Reclosers: Kyle Form 6 Microprocessor-Based Recloser Control Programming Guide

Reclosers
Kyle® Form 6 Service Information

Microprocessor-Based Recloser Control
Programming Guide S280-70-4
030028KM
Figure 1.
Kyle® Form 6 microprocessor-based recloser control front panel and ProViewTM CD-ROM.
Table of Contents
Section 1: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Important User Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................. . . . . 1-5
What’s In This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................. . . . . 1-6
Password Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................. . . . . 1-7
Front Panel Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................. . . . . 1-7
ProView Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................. . . . . 1-7
Three Levels of Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................. . . . . 1-7
Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................. . . . . 1-8
Status Indication and Control Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................. . . . . 1-8
LCD Menu Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................. . . . . 1-10
Recloser Operation and Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................. . . . . 1-12
Section 2: Front Panel Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Settings Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Metering Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Sequence of Events Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Alarm Log and Status Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Counters Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Battery Menu (Pole-Mount Control Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
DNP Protocol Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Workbench Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Clock Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Fault Locator Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Diagnostics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
I/O Control Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
I/O Status Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
Self-Clear Fault Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Test Modes Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
Nameplate Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
Table of Contents (continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
September 2003 • Supersedes 1/03 1-1

Printed in USA
Kyle Form 6 Microprocessor-Based Recloser Control Programming Guide
!
SAFETY
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
SAFETY FOR LIFE FOR LIFE
Cooper Power Systems products meet or exceed all applicable industry standards relating to product safety. We actively
promote safe practices in the use and maintenance of our products through our service literature, instructional training
programs, and the continuous efforts of all Cooper Power Systems employees involved in product design, manufacture,
marketing, and service.
We strongly urge that you always follow all locally approved safety procedures and safety instructions when working
around high voltage lines and equipment and support our “Safety For Life” mission.
SAFETY INFORMATION
The instructions in this manual are not intended as a sub- Safety Instructions
stitute for proper training or adequate experience in the
safe operation of the equipment described. Only compe- Following are general caution and warning statements
tent technicians who are familiar with this equipment that apply to this equipment. Additional statements, relat-
should install, operate, and service it. ed to specific tasks and procedures, are located through-
out the manual.
A competent technician has these qualifications:
• Is thoroughly familiar with these instructions.
DANGER: Hazardous voltage. Contact with
• Is trained in industry-accepted high- and low-voltage ! hazardous voltage will cause death or severe
safe operating practices and procedures. personal injury. Follow all locally approved safety pro-
• Is trained and authorized to energize, de-energize, cedures when working around high and low voltage
clear, and ground power distribution equipment. lines and equipment. G103.3
• Is trained in the care and use of protective equipment

such as flash clothing, safety glasses, face shield,
hard hat, rubber gloves, hotstick, etc. WARNING: Before installing, operating, main-
Following is important safety information. For safe instal-
! taining, or testing this equipment, carefully read
lation and operation of this equipment, be sure to read and understand the contents of this manual. Improper
and understand all cautions and warnings. operation, handling or maintenance can result in death,
severe personal injury, and equipment damage. G101.0
Hazard Statement Definitions

WARNING: This equipment is not intended to
This manual may contain four types of hazard
statements:
! protect human life. Follow all locally approved pro-
cedures and safety practices when installing or operat-
ing this equipment. Failure to comply can result in
DANGER: Indicates an imminently haz-
!ardous situation which, if not avoided, will
death, severe personal injury and equipment damage.
G102.1
result in death or serious injury.
WARNING: Indicates a potentially hazardous

!situation which, if not avoided, could result in WARNING: Power distribution equipment must
death or serious injury. ! be properly selected for the intended application.
It must be installed and serviced by competent person-
CAUTION: Indicates a potentially hazardous nel who have been trained and understand proper safe-
!
situation which, if not avoided, may result in ty procedures. These instructions are written for such
minor or moderate injury. personnel and are not a substitute for adequate training
and experience in safety procedures. Failure to proper-
CAUTION: Indicates a potentially hazardous situ- ly select, install, or maintain power distribution equip-
ation which, if not avoided, may result in equipment can result in death, severe personal injury, and
ment damage only. equipment damage. G122.2
1-2
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Table of Contents (continued from page 1-1)

Section 3: Using ProViewTM Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........... . . 3-1
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........... . . 3-1
Installing ProViewTM Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........... . . 3-2
Installing from a CD-ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........... . . 3-2
Launching the Setup Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........... . . 3-2
Installing ProView Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........... . . 3-3
Completing ProView Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........... . . 3-4
Log In/Log Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........... . . 3-6
Adding / Deleting Users and Changing Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........... . . 3-7
Main ProViewTM Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........... . . 3-8
File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........... . . 3-8
Manage Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........... . . 3-8
User Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........... . . 3-8
View Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........... . . 3-8
Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........... . . 3-8
Section 4: Form 6 Control Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Loading Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Communicating with the Form 6 Recloser Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Connecting to the Form 6 Recloser Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Disconnecting from the Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Adding ProView Connection Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Comparing PC Schemes and Settings to the Form 6 Recloser Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Downloading the Scheme Structure, Idea Workbench, and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Simplified Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Operations Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Using TCC EditorTM II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Reclose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Operations Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Hot Line Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
High Current Lockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Cold Load Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Sensitive Earth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Low Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
Directional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
Sync Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
Breaker Fail - LBB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
Incipient Cable Splice Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
Metering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
MMI Setup and Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
Settings Group Selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
Copy Settings Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66
Settings File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67
Settings List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68
Virtual Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70
Configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79
Load-side PT Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
Table of Contents (continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1-3
Table of Contents (continued from page 1-3)

Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
Sequence of Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
Application Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85
Oscillography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86
Data Profiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90
Factory Nameplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92
Metering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93
Demand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93
Instantaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96
Symmetrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97
Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98
Energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99
Lower Harmonics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-100
Higher Harmonics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-101
THD, True RMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102
Section 5: Idea WorkbenchTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . 5-1
Important User Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . 5-2
Accessing a Workbench Menu Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . 5-2
Hardware Idea WorkbenchTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . 5-3
Loading the Hardware (Form6) Idea Workbench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . 5-3
Idea Workbench Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . 5-4
Changing User Workbench Block Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . 5-5
Contact Inputs and Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . 5-6
Basic Tools Toolbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . 5-7
Advanced Tools Toolbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . 5-9
Basic and Advanced Tools Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . 5-11
Workbench Inputs Toolbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . 5-16
Workbench Outputs Toolbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . 5-24
Form6 Target LED Programming Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . 5-30
Building Custom Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . 5-30
Workbench Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . 5-33
Communications WorkbenchTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . 5-35
Configuring Protocol Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . 5-35
Loading a Communications Workbench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . 5-35
Workbench Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . 5-36
Change the Active Communication Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . 5-38
DNP Workbench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . 5-39
Modbus Workbench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . 5-43
2179 Workbench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . 5-44
IEC870-5-101 Workbench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . 5-47
DNP TCP/IP Workbench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . 5-50
Workbench User Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . 5-53
Workbench User Enable Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . 5-54
Workbench User Threshold Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . 5-54
Workbench Contact Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . 5-55
Workbench Contact Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . 5-55
Workbench Message Outputs to MMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . 5-56
Workbench Status Outputs to MMI and SOE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . 5-57
Workbench Analog Outputs to MMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . 5-58
Workbench MMI Softkey Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . 5-59
Workbench Mode Control Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . 5-60
Workbench Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . 5-62
1-4
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Section 1: Introduction
Thank you for purchasing the Kyle® Form 6 Microprocessor-
based Recloser Control. Offered in a rack mount, yard
mount, and pole mount design, the Form 6 Recloser
Control provides a universal platform that can be pro-
grammed for any protective application. The Form 6 control
supports customization of features to permit design and
manufacture of customer-specific configuration and operat-
ing logic.
The Form 6 recloser control provides phase and ground
current sensing and three-phase voltage sensing. The Form
6 control can compute power, energy, power factor, and
power flow direction from the current and voltage sensing.
The Form 6 control is programmed and interrogated from
the front panel or through the RS-232 serial data port also
located on the front panel. The front panel also displays
metering and alarm information.
In addition to front panel programming, control parameters
can be programmed via personal computer using the
ProViewTM interface software. Temporary connection to the
control is made through the operator panel RS-232 port.
Also, the RS-232, fiber-optic, ethernet, and RS-485 ports on
the back panel are available for SCADA or interconnections
to other devices. The interface program includes functions
used to create, modify and graphically display time-current
curves (TCCs) and provide diagnostic information. The
Form 6 control analysis tools include fault locating, event
recording, data profiler, recloser replay, and oscillography
functions. Customization tools include TCC EditorTM II, a
time-current curve modification program, and the Idea
WorkbenchTM, a complete software customization program
that enables you to design your distribution system to your
specific application.
Important User Information

The Form 6 Recloser Control offers the user the ability to
apply it in a variety of applications, to program its operation
over a wide range of parameters, and to customize its oper-
ating logic. Those responsible for the application of the
Form 6 control must satisfy themselves that the pro-
grammed operating parameters and the installed software
scheme have been tested to verify that they meet all perfor-
mance and safety requirements, including any applicable
regulations, codes, and standards.
Since there are many variables and user-selected operating
characteristics associated with any particular installation,
the user should take the necessary steps to ensure that the
design, configuration, installation, and use of operating soft-
ware (schemes) are maintained in a secure and controlled
manner by properly trained personnel.
1-5
What's In This Manual

This manual describes the basic function and features
involved in programming and operating the Form 6 Rack
Mount, Yard Mount and Pole Mount recloser controls. It pro-
vides brief descriptions of the functions of the operator
panel.
Note: This manual does not describe Form 6 Triple-Single control
functionality.
This manual is divided into five sections:
1. Introduction
2. Front Panel Operation
3. Using ProViewTM Software
4. Form 6 Control Schemes
5. Idea WorkbenchTM
This manual is to be used in conjunction with the appropri-
ate installation and operation instructions that were provid-
ed with the Form 6 recloser control:
• Service Information S280-70-1 Form 6 Rack Mount
Microprocessor-Based Recloser Control Installation
and Operation Instructions
• Service Information S280-70-2 Form 6 Yard Mount
• Service Information S280-70-3 Form 6 Pole Mount
1-6
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Password Access
The Form 6 recloser control requires a pre-assigned pass-
word for any function modifications and setting changes. A
password is required for the Form 6 control front panel and
for connecting to the control using ProView 4.0 software. No
changes will be saved without a valid password.
Front Panel Password

The default password on the Form 6 recloser control front
panel is zero (0). Press the ENTER key to enable the pass-
ENTER PASSWORD
word to view or change settings from the front panel LCD.
VALUE: 0
VIEW ONLY CANCEL Note: Most common settings, metering, alarms, and counters can
be viewed without entering a password. Refer to Front
Panel Operations section of this manual for additional
information.
ProViewTM Registration
ProView 4.0 does not require a software authorization key,
but registration is still recommended so you can easily
access valuable Workbench modifications.
Register online at
www.cooperpowercentral.com/software/proview/
Three Levels of Access

ProView 4.0 has three levels of access available.
Each level defines user privileges: View, Operate, and
ProView Access Level
Access Level Code Modify.
Modify 4 The Modify level user assigns the level of access to the
Form 6 control users.
Operate 2
View 1
Additional password and access information is available in
the Login/Logout section of the Using ProView Software
section of this manual.
1-7
Front Panel
The Form 6 recloser control front panel offers extensive
operation capabilities:
CONTROL OK
CONTROL POWER
A PHASE FAULT
B PHASE FAULT
ALARM
ABOVE MIN TRIP
A PHASE VOLTAGE
B PHASE VOLTAGE
INDICATOR 4
INDICATOR 5 • View instantaneous and demand metering quantities
CONTROL LOCKOUT C PHASE FAULT INDICATOR 1 C PHASE VOLTAGE INDICATOR 6
RECLOSER OPEN GROUND FAULT INDICATOR 2 FREQUENCY TRIP INDICATOR 7
RECLOSER CLOSED SENSITIVE GND INDICATOR 3 VOLTAGE TRIP INDICATOR 8
• View targets
METERING SETTINGS
• Check operation counters
RESET
TARGETS
OPER
COUNTER • View fault locator results
EVENTS
F1 F2 F3 F4
ALARMS
• Change setting groups
LAMP TEST
MENU + CHANGE
• Operate function keys
• Operate the recloser
ENTER —
RS-232 DATA PORT
Note: The default settings are programmed to turn off the front
KYLE F6 Recloser Control ON
GND TRIP NON
panel after ten minutes of inactivity. Except, if Hot Line Tag
SUPERVISORY
TRIP CLOSE
BLOCKED RECLOSING OFF
is On, the Hot Line Tag LEDs will remain illuminated.
CLOSE
CIRCUIT ALTERNATE ALTERNATE ALTERNATE
HOT LINE TAG
DISABLE PROFILE#1 PROFILE#2 PROFILE#3
Note: The user must commit or cancel any setting changes on the
OPTION#1 OPTION#2 OPTION#3 Form 6 control front panel MMI (man-machine interface).
(LOCKOUT)
This section of the manual is designed to familiarize you
with the structure and operation of the front panel of the
Form 6 control.
Status Indication and Control Programming

The top section of the front panel provides the status and
interrogation tools to access Form 6 recloser control infor-
mation. Twenty-five status indicator LEDs provide instant
information on the control and recloser status.
Form 6
CONTROL OK: Indicates the control is operating normally
25 Status Indicator LEDs
and not in a control alarm state.
CONTROL POWER: Indicates there is adequate charge
(voltage) to trip the recloser. Does not indicate the presence
of AC or battery power.
CONTROL LOCKOUT: Indicates the recloser is open and a
CONTROL OK A PHASE FAULT ALARM A PHASE VOLTAGE INDICATOR 4 reclosing sequence is not in progress.
CONTROL POWER B PHASE FAULT ABOVE MIN TRIP B PHASE VOLTAGE INDICATOR 5
CONTROL LOCKOUT C PHASE FAULT INDICATOR 1 C PHASE VOLTAGE INDICATOR 6
RECLOSER OPEN
RECLOSER CLOSED
GROUND FAULT
SENSITIVE GND
INDICATOR 2
INDICATOR 3
FREQUENCY TRIP
VOLTAGE TRIP
INDICATOR 7
INDICATOR 8
RECLOSER OPEN: Indicates the recloser is in the open
position.
RECLOSER CLOSED: Indicates the recloser is in the
Form 6-LS closed position.
25 Status Indicator LEDs
A PHASE FAULT, B PHASE FAULT, C PHASE FAULT:
Indicates A, B, and/or C phase current was either the maxi-
mum phase current or within 80% of the maximum when a
trip signal was issued.
GROUND FAULT, SENSITIVE GROUND FAULT: Indicates
CONTROL OK A PHASE FAULT ALARM A PHASE VOLTAGE X PHASE VOLTAGE
that a Ground and/or Sensitive Earth Fault tripping function
CONTROL POWER B PHASE FAULT ABOVE MIN TRIP B PHASE VOLTAGE Y PHASE VOLTAGE
CONTROL LOCKOUT
RECLOSER OPEN
C PHASE FAULT
GROUND FAULT
TIE
SECTIONALIZER
C PHASE VOLTAGE
FREQUENCY TRIP
Z PHASE VOLTAGE
INDICATOR 7
was asserted at the time the trip signal was asserted.
RECLOSER CLOSED SENSITIVE GND LS DISABLED VOLTAGE TRIP INDICATOR 8
ALARM: Indicates an alarm has been issued. Review the

alarm status and log on the front panel LCD display.
ABOVE MINIMUM TRIP: Current detected is above an
overcurrent minimum trip setting.
1-8
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
A PHASE VOLTAGE, B PHASE VOLTAGE, C PHASE
VOLTAGE: Indicates a presence of voltage on the respec-
tive phases. The undervoltage phase pickup setting controls
the voltage indication for the front panel LEDs as defined in
the Low Voltage setting dialog box for the active setting pro-
file. Refer to Settings - Voltage in Schemes section of this
manual.
Note: For a Form 6-LS control, these LEDs are controlled by the
Voltage Controls settings in the Loop Scheme Settings dia-
log box. A, B, and C phase is Source I for the Form 6-LS
control.
FREQUENCY TRIP: Indicates the recloser tripped due to a
frequency trip.
VOLTAGE TRIP: Indicates the recloser tripped due to a
voltage trip.
These statuses are only indicated on the standard Form
6 Control:
INDICATOR 1, INDICATOR 2, INDICATOR 3, INDICATOR
4, INDICATOR 5, INDICATOR 6, INDICATOR 7, INDICA-
TOR 8: Customizable LEDs that are used with functions
programmed through the Idea WorkbenchTM customizing
software.
These statuses are only indicated on the Form 6-LS
Control:
TIE: Indicates the control is in tie mode and responding to
voltage conditions on Source I and Source II.
SECTIONALIZER: Indicates the control is in sectionalizing
mode and is responding to voltage conditions on Source I.
LS DISABLED: Indicates the LS accessory is not active.
X PHASE VOLTAGE, Y PHASE VOLTAGE, Z PHASE
VOLTAGE: For a Form 6-LS control, these LEDs are con-
trolled by the Voltage Controls settings in the Loop Scheme
Settings dialog box. These LEDs indicate Source II voltage
is present on X, Y, or Z phase. Source II is the load side of
the recloser.
INDICATOR 7, INDICATOR 8: Customizable LEDs that are
used with functions programmed through the Idea
WorkbenchTM customizing software.
1-9
LCD Menu Display

The LCD display is a 4 line, 20-character wide display with
The MENU key allows dedicated cursor control and menu maneuvering buttons
the user to select menu that provide the user access to all settings, targets, and
items or step back or LCD Display, measurements. Most settings can be changed directly from
exit from submenus. 4-Line, 20 Character the operator panel without the interface software.
Note: Only four line items appear on the LCD display at one time.
Moving the cursor down from the fourth line will shift the
line items up one line at a time.
LCD Display: A 4-line, 20-character display. The LCD display
panel contrast is field-adjustable to allow for various mount-
ing heights and applications: Press the MENU key and then
F1 F2 F3 F4
press (+) or (–) key to increase or decrease contrast.
MENU + Four LCD Navigation Buttons: MENU, ENTER, +, –
LCD Menu Command Selection Keys (F1, F2, F3, F4):
Select, accept, or cancel LCD menu commands.
ENTER — Four Cursor Movement Arrows: Move the cursor left <, right
>, up ^, down v.
The current location on the menu is indicated by a cursor
The ENTER Cursor The + or - keys (>). To choose a menu item, shift the cursor to the item and
key allows the Movement allow changes to press the ENTER key. The appropriate submenu opens.
user to access Arrows numeric settings.
the submenus.
MENU
>SETTINGS
METERING
SEQUENCE OF EVENTS
ALARM LOG & STATUS
COUNTERS
BATTERY
DNP PROTOCOL
WORKBENCH
CLOCK
FAULT LOCATOR
DIAGNOSTICS
I/O CONTROL
I/O STATUS
SELF-CLEAR FAULT: N
TEST MODES
NAMEPLATE DATA
ENTER
Refer to the Front Panel Operation section of this manual

for information regarding each Menu item.
1-10
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
LCD Menu Hot Keys

Eight “one-touch” analysis keys for one-button access to a
8 Analysis Keys variety of control and monitoring functions that appear in the
LCD display. Pressing these buttons is a shortcut to access-
ing functions without scrolling through the LCD menus.
• METERING: Displays the systems instantaneous
metering values for current and voltage.
METERING SETTINGS
• RESET TARGETS: Resets fault targets immediately
RESET OPER
TARGETS COUNTER (regardless of any programmed intentional time delay).
F1 F2 F3 F4
EVENTS ALARMS
Note: If the fault resulting in the target is still present, the
LAMP TEST
MENU + CHANGE
target resets and immediately indicates again.
• EVENTS: Displays the last 25 SOE events.
ENTER — • LAMP TEST: Illuminates all operator panel LEDs for
verification of proper connection and operating status
of all indicating lights. Enables the text message dis-
play feature.
• SETTINGS: Modify or View recloser settings on the
LCD display.
• OPER COUNTER: Displays the total number of trip
operations, target operations, and resets all counters.
• ALARMS: Provides status information on all recloser
alarms.
• CHANGE: Must be pressed to allow a change to the
nine function keys.
Note: The CHANGE mode is a 10 second period in which
one function setting can be changed. If no change is
made in that time, the control returns to the root menu.
Recloser Operation and Function Keys

The bottom section of the front panel contains operation
and function tools for the Form 6 recloser control:
• TRIP Pushbutton: Trips the recloser from the operator
panel. Opens the recloser and locks out the control,
preventing any further automatic reclosing operations.
• CLOSE Pushbutton: Closes the recloser. The control
KYLE F6 Recloser Control ON
is ready for a new trip/close sequence.
TRIP CLOSE CLOSE • HOT LINE TAG: Prevents all closing attempts and
CIRCUIT
DISABLE HOT LINE TAG shifts protection to one trip-to-lockout on the composite
curve based upon TCC1 and the programmed definite
time. Refer to the appropriate Form 6 control installa-
(LOCKOUT) tion manual for additional information on Hot Line Tag.
Note: When Hot Line Tag and CLPU are both active the
Form 6 control reverts back to the original minimum
pick-up values (i.e. disables CLPU settings).
• CLOSE CIRCUIT DISABLE: Provides a visible discon-
nect in the closed circuit. Removing the 15 Amp fuse
disables all electrical closing of the recloser. Refer to the
appropriate Form 6 control installation manual for
additional information on Close Circuit Disable.
1-11
Nine Function Keys

• GROUND TRIP BLOCKED: Blocks ground trip fault
detection.
Note: When the Ground Trip Blocked feature is Enabled,
GND TRIP NON SUPERVISORY
the Sensitive Earth Fault feature is Disabled.
BLOCKED RECLOSING OFF
• NON-RECLOSING: Disables any automatic reclosing
ALTERNATE ALTERNATE ALTERNATE
operations. Non-reclosing does not alter the active
PROFILE#1 PROFILE#2 PROFILE#3 time-current curve (TCC).
• SUPERVISORY BLOCKED: Blocks the ability of the
OPTION#1 OPTION#2 OPTION#3 recloser to respond to any supervisory command sent
by serial communication ports or hardwired inputs.
Form 6 Control Function Keys
• OPTION 1 through OPTION 3: These keys are cus-
tomizable through the Idea WorkbenchTM. Refer to the
appropriate Form 6 control installation manual for
instructions on labeling customized options.
These function keys are only available on the standard
Form 6 Control:
The CHANGE key must be pressed prior to
activating or de-activating these functions. • ALTERNATE PROFILES 1, 2, 3: The Form 6 control
has a "Normal" profile and three “Alternate” profiles
that change all protection parameters for the control.
If Alternate profile 1, 2, or 3 is active, the correspond-
ing function key LED illuminates. Normal profile is
active, when all of the Alternate profile function key
Form 6-LS Control Function Keys LEDs are not illuminated.
Only one profile is active at any time.
GND TRIP NON SUPERVISORY
BLOCKED RECLOSING OFF These function keys are only available on the Form 6-
LS Control:
SOURCE I SOURCE II
LS RESET
ENABLED ENABLED • LS RESET: Resets the LS function, so the control
is ready to respond to the next loss of voltage
OPTION#1 OPTION#2 OPTION#3 occurrence.
• SOURCE I ENABLED: The control is in LS mode and
responding to voltage conditions on Source I (Source
side - Phases A, B, and C).
• SOURCE II ENABLED: The control is in Tie mode
and responding to voltage conditions on Source II
(Load side - Phases X, Y, and Z).
1-12
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Section 2: Front Panel Operation

This section describes front panel programming only. Refer
to Section 4: Form 6 Control Schemes for descriptions of
the full complement of programmable functions.
CAUTION: System Misoperation. The CAUTION: Recloser Misoperation. Before

!
process of downloading a new scheme file will ! downloading configuration files or settings to
cause this device to stop functioning as a protective the equipment, verify that the files and settings are cor-
device for a period of approximately 8 seconds. Safe rect for the location and application. Downloading con-
operating practices must be observed while download- figuration files or settings designed for a different loca-
ing scheme files. Failure to comply can result in sys- tion or application can result in severe personal injury
tem misoperation. T299.0 and equipment damage. G133.0
Settings Menu
The Settings menu allows viewing and modification of func-
tion settings for all protection profiles in the Form 6 recloser
>SETTINGS control.
METERING
SEQUENCE OF EVENTS Note: The Active Profile and the profile to be edited are both dis-
ALARM LOG & STATUS
played. Changes are made to the profile displayed in the
ENTER Edit Profile line of the LCD.
>Mod/View Settings
If Alternate profile 1, 2, or 3 is active, the corresponding func-
tion key LED illuminates. Normal profile is active when none
of the Alternate profile function key LEDs are illuminated.
ENTER
ENTER PASSWORD Only one profile is active at any time.

VALUE: 0 To access the SETTINGS Menu in VIEW ONLY mode:
VIEW ONLY CANCEL
F1 ENTER 1. Move the cursor (>) to SETTINGS.

(or Press F1 to VIEW ONLY)
2. Press ENTER.
>Actv Profi Norm
Edit Profi Norm 3. Select MOD/VIEW SETTINGS with the cursor (>).
Overcurrent Setting
Oper Sequence
Reclose Intervals
4. Press ENTER.
ResetTime 30.00
Cold Load Pickup 5. Press F1 to enter VIEW ONLY mode.
Frequency
Voltage 6. Choose the applicable setting to View.
Sensitive Earth Flt
7. Press ENTER.
To access the SETTINGS Menu in MODIFY mode:
1. Move the cursor (>) to SETTINGS.
2. Press ENTER.
3. Select MOD/VIEW SETTINGS with the cursor (>).
4. Press ENTER.
SETTINGS
5. Press ENTER at "ENTER PASSWORD".
OPER
COUNTER
Note: Password default is zero (0). Refer to MMI Setup
F2 F3 F4
SETTINGS and Password section of this manual to change the
ALARMS
password.
+ CHANGE
Analysis
Key 6. Choose the applicable setting to Modify.
7. Press ENTER.
Note: As a shortcut, the SETTINGS menu can also be accessed
from the SETTINGS analysis key on the front panel.
2-1
Modify Protection Profile Group

The EDIT PROFI setting shows the protection profile to be
>Actv Profi Norm
Edit Profi Norm
modified in the control. You can toggle between the differ-
Overcurrent Setting
Oper Sequence
ent protection profiles available in the Form 6 control. Each
Reclose Intervals Identifies the protection protection profile group (Normal, Alternate Profile #1,
ResetTime 30.00
Cold Load Pickup profile group to be Alternate Profile #2, Alternate Profile #3) contains the set-
Frequency modified.
Voltage
tings shown in the SETTINGS>Mod/View Settings sub-
Sensitive Earth Flt menu. The line items listed under EDIT PROFI are the set-
tings of the profile group to be modified.
These are the settings of the Note: Only four line items appear on the LCD display at one time.
designated protection profile group. Moving the cursor down from the fourth line will shift the
line items up one line at a time.
To change the protection profile group to be modified:
>Edit Profile
1. Use the cursor movement key (>) and place the
Press [+] or [-] key cursor next to the EDIT PROFI line item in the LCD
Norm
CANCEL display.
ENTER
Identifies current
modified profile group 2. Press ENTER.
>Edit Profile
Press [+] or [-] key 3. Press (+) or (–) keys to toggle to the appropriate pro-
Alt1
CANCEL tection profile.
ENTER
F4 4. Press ENTER to accept the change or press F4 to
(or Press F4 to CANCEL) CANCEL the command.
>Actv Profi Norm
Edit Profi Alt1
You have returned to the SETTINGS list.
Overcurrent Setting
Oper Sequence The EDIT PROFI line item now displays the new profile
New profile group
group to be modified.
to be modified
IMPORTANT: The settings displayed on the front panel
LCD are the Edit Profile Group settings. To view the Active
Profile Group settings, the Edit Profile line must be set to
match the Active Profile line on the LCD.
Overcurrent Protection Settings

Normal profile is active, when the Alternate Profile function
key LEDs are not illuminated.
ALTERNATE ALTERNATE ALTERNATE
PROFILE #1 PROFILE #2 PROFILE #3 To activate an Alternate Overcurrent Protection profile:
Normal Profile is ACTIVE 1. Press CHANGE key on front panel.
(no LEDs are illuminated)
2. Select either ALTERNATE PROFILE 1, 2 or 3.
ALTERNATE ALTERNATE ALTERNATE Within five seconds, the selected Alternate Profile LED
PROFILE #1 PROFILE #2 PROFILE #3 illuminates.
Alternate Profile #3 is ACTIVE Note: Alternate Profile 1, 2, and 3 one-touch function keys are
not standard for the Form 6-LS control.
2-2
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
>SETTINGS
The OVERCURRENT protection LCD display lists the
METERING Phase, Ground, and Negative Sequence overcurrent pro-
SEQUENCE OF EVENTS
ALARM LOG & STATUS tection settings that are common to TCC1 and TCC2. The
ENTER settings shown are for the protection profile indicated in the
>Mod/View Settings EDIT PROFI line. To View the active profile settings, the
EDIT PROFI line must be set to match the ACTV PROFI
line. Each of these submenus (phase ground, and negative
ENTER
sequence) shows:
ENTER PASSWORD
• The overcurrent minimum trip value
VALUE: 0
VIEW ONLY CANCEL
• Provides access to submenus TCC1 and TCC2, and
F1 ENTER their respective operation parameters:
Actv Profi Norm • Multiplier Settings
Edit Profi Norm
>Overcurrent Setting
Oper Sequence Overcurrent • Adder Settings
ENTER
protection settings • Minimum Response Time Adder Settings
for this profile group.
>Phase
Ground
• High Current Trip Settings
Negative Sequence
These settings can be modified from the front panel or the
ENTER interface software. Following is a brief description of each.
>TCCPMinTrip 100.0 Note: The Form 6 recloser control is a three-phase device; all
TCC1
TCC2 three phases trip on the settings programmed.
Minimum Trip (for Phase, Ground, and Negative Sequence)

Minimum Trip defines the minimum current necessary to
begin timing on the programmed time-current curve.
>TCCPMinTrip 100.0 Note: "P" applies to Phase, "G" applies to Ground, and "Q"
TCC1
TCC2 applies to Negative Sequence.
Each Minimum Trip LCD screen will show:
ENTER
TCCPMinTrip see help

• the unit of measurement in primary Amperes
MIN: 5.00 MAX: 3200
VALUE: 100.000 Before changing • the minimum to maximum input value range
CANCEL ^
minimum trip values,
Press < or > to move the selection • the minimum trip threshold value (can be changed
cursor to the position underneath refer to Changing
the digit you want to change. Overcurrent
from the front panel)
Press + or - to increase or decrease Protection Parameters Note: Phase, Ground, and Negative Sequence Tripping can be
the number above the selection cursor.
in the Form 6 Control independently disabled with the ProView interface software.
TCCPMinTrip see help Schemes – Settings – This is used for testing purposes.
MIN: 5.00 MAX: 3200
VALUE: 170.000 Operations
CANCEL ^ Parameters section of CAUTION: Equipment Damage. Verify the maximum
F1 this manual for setting short time recloser limit for the recloser type prior to
ENTER
(or Press F1 to CANCEL)
range information. changing minimum trip values. Refer to Reference
>TCCPMinTrip 170.0
Data R280-91-34. Failure to do so can cause damage
TCC1 to the recloser under load conditions. T310.0
TCC2
MENU
The diagram at the left shows the screen process of setting
SELECT AN OPTION
the applicable minimum trip for phase.
FOR THE ALTERED
SETTINGS:
USE REVERT BACK
IMPORTANT: Always verify the minimum trip values
F1 F2 F4 are appropriate for the CT Ratio.
Note: The screen setup is the same for Phase, Ground, and
Negative Sequence.
2-3
Curve Selection for TCC1 and TCC2

The TCC1 and TCC2 series of screens allow you to pro-
>SETTINGS
METERING gram the Form 6 control with the settings associated with
SEQUENCE OF EVENTS
ALARM LOG & STATUS
specific curve characteristics for the TCC1 and TCC2 curve
ENTER
shapes. These screens give the user access to 45 standard
>Mod/View Settings
time-current curves, plus five custom curves and curve
modifiers.
The Form 6 ProView interface software contains dialog
ENTER
boxes where you can launch TCC EditorTM II and customize
ENTER PASSWORD
these curves. Refer to Using the TCC Editor II section of
VALUE:
VIEW ONLY
0
CANCEL
this manual.
F1 ENTER Screens TCC1Curve and TCC2Curve (Phase, Ground, and
Negative Sequence) settings define the characteristics of
Actv Profi Norm
Edit Profi Norm the following time-current curves: Kyle TCCs 101 through
Oper Sequence
202, along with a Constant (definite time) TCC; ANSI
ENTER
Inverse, Very Inverse, Extremely Inverse; IEC Inverse, Very
Inverse, Extremely Inverse; and 5 custom curves identified
>Phase
Ground as USER1 through USER5.
Negative Sequence
Note: The user curves are definable using the TCC Editor II
ENTER through the interface software.
TCCPMinTrip 100.0 TCCPMinTrip 100.0 Note: "P" applies to Phase, "G" applies to Ground, and "Q"
>TCC1 TCC1
TCC2 >TCC2 applies to Negative Sequence.
The diagram at the left shows the screen process of select-
ENTER ENTER
ing a phase curve for use as TCC1 or TCC2. This process
>TCC1PCurve
TCC1MultE
104
Disable
>TCC2PCurve
TCC2MultE
117
Disable
is the same for selecting ground and negative sequence
TCC1PMult 1.000 TCC2PMult 1.000 curves for TCC1 and TCC2.
TCC1PAddEn Disable TCC2PAddEn Disable
ENTER ENTER
TCC1PCurve TCC2PCurve
Press [+] or [-] key Press [+] or [-] key
104 117
CANCEL CANCEL
+ or - + or -
TCC1PCurve TCC2PCurve
Press [+] or [-] key Press [+] or [-] key
117 101
CANCEL CANCEL
F4 F4
ENTER ENTER
(or Press F4 to CANCEL) (or Press F4 to CANCEL)
>TCC1PCurve 117 >TCC2PCurve 101

TCC1MultE Disable TCC2MultE Disable
TCC1PMult 1.000 TCC2PMult 1.000
MENU
SELECT AN OPTION
FOR THE ALTERED
SETTINGS:
USE REVERT BACK
F1 F2 F4
2-4
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Multiplier for TCC1 and TCC2

To Enable Multiplier: The Multiplier setting defines a Time Multiplier to modify the
Actv Profi Norm
position of the original TCC in time-current space and the
Edit Profi
Norm ability to enable the multiplier. If the Time Multiplier is
Oper Sequence enabled, the trip time of a given TCC at the measured cur-
ENTER rent is shifted in time by the specific multiplier.
>Phase
Ground For example, if a curve has an operation time of 40 millisec-
Negative Sequence
onds, and a multiplier of 2, the “modified” operation time
ENTER would be 80 milliseconds.
TCCPMinTrip 100.0 TCCPMinTrip 100.0
>TCC1 TCC1
40 ms x 2 = 80 ms
TCC2 >TCC2
Similarly, if the same curve has an operation time of 5 sec-
ENTER ENTER onds, the multiplier produces a modified time of 10 seconds.
TCC1PCurve
>TCC1MultE
104
Disable
TCC2PCurve
>TCC2MultE
117
Disable
5 sec x 2 = 10 seconds
TCC1PAddEn Disable TCC2PAddEn Disable Note: These curve modifications can be predefined and viewed in
ENTER ENTER
TCC Editor II and imported with ProView interface software.
TCC1PMultEnable TCC2PMultEnable The diagram at the left shows the screen process of select-
Disable Disable ing a multiplier for the curves selected as TCC1 or TCC2.
CANCEL CANCEL
This process is the same for selecting ground and negative
+ or - + or -
sequence curves for TCC1 and TCC2.
TCC1PMultEnable TCC2PMultEnable
PRESS [+] OR [-] KEY
Enable
Enable
When you select the Multiplier parameter, the minimum and
CANCEL CANCEL maximum selection limits of the setting are displayed.
F4 F4
ENTER ENTER
TCC1PCurve 104 TCC2PCurve 117

>TCC1MultE Enable >TCC2MultE Enable
MENU
SELECT AN OPTION
FOR THE ALTERED
SETTINGS:
USE REVERT BACK
F1 F2 F4
To Set Multiplier:
>TCC1PMult 1.000 >TCC2PMult 1.000
ENTER ENTER
TCC1PMult TCC2PMult
MIN: 0.10 MAX: 25.0 MIN: 0.10 MAX: 25.0
VALUE: 1.000 VALUE: 1.000
CANCEL ^ CANCEL ^
Press < or > to move the selection cursor to the position underneath
the digit you want to change.
Press + or - to increase or decrease the number above the selection cursor.
TCC1PMult TCC2PMult
MIN: 0.10 MAX: 25.0 MIN: 0.10 MAX: 25.0
CANCEL ^ CANCEL ^
F1 ENTER F1 ENTER
>TCC1PMult 1.030 >TCC2PMult 1.060
MENU
SELECT AN OPTION
FOR THE ALTERED
SETTINGS:
USE REVERT BACK
F1 F2 F4
2-5
Adder for TCC1 and TCC2

The Adder settings define a Time Adder to modify the posi-
To Enable Adder: tion of the original TCC in time-current space and the ability
Actv Profi
Edit Profi
Norm
Norm
to enable it. With the Adder enabled, the trip time of a given
Oper Sequence
TCC at a measured current is shifted in time by the speci-
ENTER
fied additional time. In contrast to the time multiplier, the
>Phase
Adder adds a constant time to the curve, regardless of the
Ground
Negative Sequence
unmodified curve.
For example, if a curve has an operate time of 40 ms and a
ENTER
1 second time adder, the modified operate time is 1.040
>TCC1 TCC1 seconds.
TCC2 >TCC2
0.040 seconds + 1 second = 1.040 seconds
ENTER ENTER
Similarly, if the same curve has a multiplier of 2 producing
TCC1PMultE Disable TCC2PMultE Disable
an operate time of 5 seconds, the one second time adder
>TCC1PAddEn
TCC1PAdd
Disable
0.000
>TCC2PAddEn
TCC2PAdd
Disable
0.000
produces a modified time of 6 seconds.
ENTER ENTER 5 seconds (2.5 seconds x 2) + 1 second = 6 seconds
TCC2PAddEnable
TCC1PAddEnable Note: The time multiplier takes precedence over the time adder.
PRESS [+] OR [-] KEY PRESS [+] OR [-] KEY
Disable Disable
CANCEL CANCEL Note: These curve modifications can be predefined and viewed in
+ or - + or -
TCC Editor II and imported using Form 6 ProView Interface
TCC1PAddEnable TCC2PAddEnable
software included with the control.
Enable Enable The diagram at the left shows the screen process of select-
CANCEL CANCEL
ing the Adder for TCC1 and TCC2. When you select the
ENTER
F4
ENTER
F4 Adder parameter, the minimum and maximum selection lim-
(or Press F4 to CANCEL) (or Press F4 to CANCEL) its of the setting are displayed. This process is the same for
TCC1PMultE Disable TCC2PMultE Disable selecting ground and negative sequence curves for TCC1
>TCC1PAddEn Enable >TCC2PAddEn Enable and TCC2.
TCC1PAdd 0.000 TCC2PAdd 0.000
MENU
Note: Only four line items appear on the LCD display at one time.
Moving the cursor down from the fourth line will shift the
SELECT AN OPTION
FOR THE ALTERED line items up one line at a time.
SETTINGS:
USE REVERT BACK
F1 F2 F4
To Set Adder:
>TCC1PAdd 0.000 >TCC2PAdd 0.000
ENTER ENTER
TCC1PAdd TCC2PAdd
MIN: 0.00 MAX: 30.0 MIN: 0.00 MAX: 30.0
CANCEL ^ CANCEL ^
TCC1PAdd TCC2PAdd
MIN: 0.00 MAX: 30.0 MIN: 0.00 MAX: 30.0
CANCEL ^ CANCEL ^
F1 ENTER F1 ENTER
>TCC1PAdd 0.010 >TCC2PAdd 0.060
MENU
SELECT AN OPTION
FOR THE ALTERED
SETTINGS:
USE REVERT BACK
F1 F2 F4
2-6
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Minimum Response Time Adder for TCC1 and TCC2

To Enable MRTA : The Minimum Response Time Adder (MRTA) setting defines
Actv Profi Norm a minimum response time that modifies the shape of the
Edit Profi Norm
>Overcurrent Setting original TCC in time-current space and the ability to enable
Oper Sequence
the MRTA.
ENTER
>Phase When enabled, the minimum response time of a given TCC

Ground
Negative Sequence can be no less that the value of the MRTA.
Note: These curve modifications can be predefined and viewed in
ENTER
TCC Editor II and imported using ProView Interface soft-
>TCC1 TCC1 ware included with the control.
TCC2 >TCC2
ENTER ENTER
30 1800
20 1200
>TCC1PMRTAE Disable >TCC2PMRTAE Disable
TCC1PMRTA 0.013 TCC2PMRTA 1.000 133
ENTER ENTER 10 600

8 480
TCC1PMRTAEnable TCC2PMRTAEnable 360
6
PRESS [+] OR [-] KEY PRESS [+] OR [-] KEY 5 300
Disable Disable 4 240
CANCEL CANCEL
3 180
+ or - + or -
TIME [cycles (60 hertz basis)]

2 120
TCC1PMRTAE TCC2PMRTAEnable
Enable Enable 1 60
TIME (sec)
CANCEL CANCEL 48
.8
.6 36
F4 F4 .5 30
ENTER ENTER
.4 24
.3 Minimum 18
TCC1PAddEn Disable TCC2PAddEn Disable Response

TCC1PAdd 0.000 TCC2PAdd 0.000 .2 Time 12
>TCC1PMRTAE Enable >TCC2PMRTAE Enable

TCC1PMRTA 0.013 TCC2PMRTA 1.000 6 Cycles
0.1 6.0
MENU .08 4.8
.06 3.6
SELECT AN OPTION 3.0
.05
FOR THE ALTERED
.04 2.4
SETTINGS:
USE REVERT BACK .03 1.8
.02 1.2
F1 F2 F4
.01 0.6
50000
10000
20000
30000
40000
1000
2000
3000
4000
5000
6000
8000
100
200
300
400
500
600
800
50
60
80
To Set MRTA Adder:

CURRENT (percent of minimum trip)
TCC1PMRTAE Disable TCC2PMRTAE Disable
>TCC1PMRTA 0.013 >TCC2PMRTA 1.000
ENTER ENTER
TCC1PMRTA TCC2PMRTA
MIN: 0.01 MAX: 1.00 MIN: 0.01 MAX: 1.00
CANCEL ^ CANCEL ^
TCC1PMRTA TCC2PMRTA
MIN: 0.01 MAX: 1.00 MIN: 0.01 MAX: 1.00
VALUE: 0.015 VALUE: .950
CANCEL ^ CANCEL ^
F1 F1
ENTER ENTER
TCC1PAddEn Disable TCC2PAddE Disable
TCC1PMRTAE Disable TCC2PMRTAE Disable
>TCC1PMRTA 0.015 >TCC2PMRTA 0.950
MENU
SELECT AN OPTION
FOR THE ALTERED
SETTINGS:
USE REVERT BACK
F1 F2 F4
2-7
High Current Trip Settings for TCC1 and TCC2

High Current Trip (HCT) settings define high current trip, a
To Enable HCT:
time delay and an enable setting to modify the shape of the
Actv Profi Norm
Edit Profi Norm original TCC in time-current space. If HCT is enabled, the
Oper Sequence shape of the TCC at currents beyond the HCT setting is
ENTER definite time as defined by the HCT time delay.
>Phase
Ground
Negative Sequence
ENTER
To Set HCT Delay:
TCCPMinTrip 100.0 TCCPMinTrip 100.0 TCC1PMRTA 0.013 TCC2PMRTA 1.000
>TCC1 TCC1 TCC1PHCTEn Disable TCC2PHCTEn Disable
TCC2 >TCC2 TCC1PHCT Mul 32.00 TCC2PHCT Mul 32.00
>TCC1PHCTDly 0.016 >TCC2PHCTDly 0.016
TCC1PMRTA 0.013 TCC2PMRTA 1.00 ENTER ENTER

>TCC1PHCTEn Disable >TCC2PHCTEn Disable
TCC1PHCT Mul 32.00 TCC2PHCT Mul 32.00 TCC1PHCTDly (sec) TCC2PHCTDly (sec)
TCC1PHCTDly 0.016 TCC2PHCTDly 0.016 MIN: 0.01 MAX: 0.15 MIN: 0.01 MAX: 0.15
ENTER ENTER CANCEL ^ CANCEL ^
TCC1PHCTEnable TCC2PHCTEnable Press < or > to move the selection cursor to the position underneath
PRESS [+] OR [-] KEY PRESS [+] OR [-] KEY the digit you want to change.
Disable Disable
CANCEL CANCEL
+ or - + or - TCC1PHCTDly (sec) TCC2PHCTDly (sec)

MIN: 0.01 MAX: 0.15 MIN: 0.01 MAX: 0.15
TCC1PHCTEnable TCC2PHCTEnable VALUE: 0.019 VALUE: 0.019
CANCEL ^ CANCEL ^
Enable Enable
CANCEL CANCEL
F1 F1
ENTER ENTER
F4 F4
ENTER ENTER (or Press F1 to CANCEL) (or Press F1 to CANCEL)
(or Press F4 to CANCEL) (or Press F4 to CANCEL) TCC1PMRTA 0.013 TCC2PMRTA 1.000
TCC1PHCTEn Disable TCC2PHCTEn Disable
TCC1PMRTA 0.013 TCC2PMRTA 1.00
TCC1PHCT Mul 32.00 TCC2PHCT Mul 32.00
>TCC1PHCTEn Enable >TCC2PHCTEn Enable
TCC1PHCT Mul 32.00 TCC2PHCT Mul 32.00 >TCC1PHCTDly 0.019 >TCC2PHCTDly 0.019
TCC1PHCTDly 0.016 TCC2PHCTDly 0.016
MENU
MENU
SELECT AN OPTION
SELECT AN OPTION FOR THE ALTERED
FOR THE ALTERED SETTINGS:
SETTINGS: USE REVERT BACK
USE REVERT BACK
F1 F2 F4
F1 F2 F4
To Set HCT:
ENTER ENTER
TCC1PMRTA 0.013 TCC2PMRTA 1.00

TCC1PHCTEn Disable TCC2PHCTEn Disable
>TCC1PHCT Mul 32.00 >TCC2PHCT Mul 32.00
TCC1PHCTDly 0.016 TCC2PHCTDly 0.016
ENTER ENTER
TCC1PHCT Mul TCC2PHCT Mul

MIN: 1.00 MAX: 32.0 MIN: 1.00 MAX: 32.0
VALUE: 32.000 VALUE: 32.000
CANCEL ^ CANCEL ^
TCC MODIFIERS WITH HIGH CURRENT TRIP
TCC1PHCT Mul TCC2PHCT Mul 1) Basic TCC
2) Minimum Response Time (5 cycles)
MIN: 1.00 MAX: 32.0 MIN: 1.00 MAX: 32.0 3) High Current Trip Time Delay
VALUE: 31.000 VALUE: 31.000 TCC MODIFIERS WITHOUT HIGH CURRENT TRIP Response Time (4 Cycles)
1) Basic TCC 4) 2x Multiplier
CANCEL ^ CANCEL ^ 5) 0.1 Second Time Adder
(6 cycles) Does not add to High Current Trip Time Delay
3) 2x Multiplier
F1 F1 4) 0.08 sec. Time Adder (5 cycles)
ENTER ENTER
2x Multiplier 5
(or Press F1 to CANCEL) (or Press F1 to CANCEL) 16 cycles
TCC1PMRTA 0.013 TCC2PMRTA 1.00 4

TCC1PHCTEn Disable TCC2PHCTEn Disable 1 15 cycles 10 cycles
>TCC1PHCT Mul 31.00 >TCC2PHCT Mul 31.00 10 cycles 4
8 cycles
TCC1PHCTDly 0.016 TCC2PHCTDly 0.016 2

2x Multiplier 4
5 cycles
5
3
MENU 1 4 cycles
SELECT AN OPTION 5 cycles

3
FOR THE ALTERED High Current Trip
SETTINGS: 2
USE REVERT BACK
These diagrams show modified TCCs with and without the effects of high current trip.
F1 F2 F4 They also show the precedence when more than one modifier is used.
2-8
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Operation Sequence
The Operation Sequence submenu lets you program:
• the operations-to-lockout
• sequence of overcurrent trip operations for
phase/negative sequence, and ground.
Operations-to-Lockout
Operations-to-Lockout defines the maximum number of trip
>SETTINGS
operations in a sequence before the control opens and locks
METERING out. The count includes phase, ground, and negative
SEQUENCE OF EVENTS
ALARM LOG & STATUS sequence trips as well as sequence coordination operations.
ENTER
>Mod/View Settings
ing operations-to-lockout.
Note: Pressing (+) increases the number of operations; pressing
ENTER (–) decreases the number.
ENTER PASSWORD
VALUE: 0
VIEW ONLY CANCEL
F1 ENTER
Actv Profi Norm

Edit Profi Norm
Overcurrent Setting Operation Sequence settings
>Oper Sequence
for this profile group.
ENTER
>Operations 4
Phase/Neg Seq
Ground
ENTER
Operations to LO
Press [+] or [-] key
4
CANCEL
+ or -
Operations to LO
2
CANCEL
F4
ENTER
>Operations 2
Phase/Neg Seq
Ground
MENU
SELECT AN OPTION
FOR THE ALTERED
SETTINGS:
USE REVERT BACK
F1 F2 F4
2-9
Operation Sequence - Phase/Negative Sequence

Operations Sequence settings for Phase and Negative
Sequence define the order in which phase and negative
sequence curves designated as TCC1 and TCC2 will trip.
Actv Profi Norm

Edit Profi Norm
Overcurrent Setting
>Oper Sequence
ENTER
Operations 4
>Phase/Neg Seq
Ground
ENTER
>PQOper#1 TCC1 PQOper#1 TCC1 PQOper#1 TCC1 PQOper#1 TCC1

PQOper#2 TCC1 >PQOper#2 TCC1 PQOper#2 TCC1 PQOper#2 TCC1
PQOper#3 TCC2 PQOper#3 TCC2 >PQOper#3 TCC2 PQOper#3 TCC2
PQOper#4 TCC2 PQOper#4 TCC2 PQOper#4 TCC2 >PQOper#4 TCC2
ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER
PQOper#1 PQOper#2 PQOper#3 PQOper#4

Press [+] or [-] key Press [+] or [-] key Press [+] or [-] key Press [+] or [-] key
TCC1 TCC1 TCC2 TCC2
CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL CANCEL
+ or - + or - + or - + or -
>PQOper#1 >PQOper#2 >PQOper#3 >PQOper#4
TCC2 TCC2 TCC1 TCC1
F4 F4 F4 F4
(or Press F4 to CANCEL) (or Press F4 to CANCEL) (or Press F4 to CANCEL) (or Press F4 to CANCEL)
>PQOper#1 TCC2 PQOper#1 TCC2 PQOper#1 TCC2 PQOper#1 TCC2
PQOper#2 TCC1 >PQOper#2 TCC2 PQOper#2 TCC2 PQOper#2 TCC2
PQOper#3 TCC2 PQOper#3 TCC2 >PQOper#3 TCC1 PQOper#3 TCC1
PQOper#4 TCC2 PQOper#4 TCC2 PQOper#4 TCC2 >PQOper#4 TCC1
MENU
SELECT AN OPTION
FOR THE ALTERED
SETTINGS:
USE REVERT BACK
F1 F2 F4
2-10
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Operation Sequence - Ground

Operations Sequence settings for Ground define the order
in which ground curves designated as TCC1 and TCC2 will
trip.
Actv Profi Norm

Edit Profi Norm
Overcurrent Setting
>Oper Sequence
ENTER
Operations 4
Phase/Neg Seq
>Ground
ENTER
>GndOper#1 TCC1 GndOper#1 TCC1 GndOper#1 TCC1 GndOper#1 TCC1

GndOper#2 TCC1 >GndOper#2 TCC1 GndOper#2 TCC1 GndOper#2 TCC1
GndOper#3 TCC2 GndOper#3 TCC2 >GndOper#3 TCC2 GndOper#3 TCC2
GndOper#4 TCC2 GndOper#4 TCC2 GndOper#4 TCC2 >GndOper#4 TCC2

GndOper#1 GndOper#2 GndOper#3 GndOper#4
TCC1 TCC1 TCC2 TCC2
+ or - + or - + or - + or -
GndOper#1 GndOper#2 GndOper#3 GndOper#4
TCC2 TCC2 TCC1 TCC1
F4 F4 F4 F4
(or Press F4 to CANCEL) (or Press F4 to CANCEL) (or Press F4 to CANCEL) (or Press F4 to CANCEL)
>GndOper#1 TCC2 GndOper#1 TCC2 GndOper#1 TCC2 GndOper#1 TCC2
GndOper#2 TCC1 >GndOper#2 TCC2 GndOper#2 TCC2 GndOper#2 TCC2
GndOper#3 TCC2 GndOper#3 TCC2 >GndOper#3 TCC1 GndOper#3 TCC1
GndOper#4 TCC2 GndOper#4 TCC2 GndOper#4 TCC2 >GndOper#4 TCC1
MENU
SELECT AN OPTION
FOR THE ALTERED
SETTINGS:
USE REVERT BACK
F1 F2 F4
2-11
Reclose Intervals
Reclose interval settings define the time the recloser is
open following a trip operation, prior to issuing a reclose
command to the recloser.
The diagram shows the screen selection process of select-
ing Reclose Intervals for Phase/Negative Sequence and
Ground.
Phase/Negative Sequence
>SETTINGS
METERING
SEQUENCE OF EVENTS
ALARM LOG & STATUS
ENTER
>Mod/View Settings
ENTER
ENTER PASSWORD
VALUE: 0
VIEW ONLY CANCEL
F1 ENTER
Edit Profi Norm

Overcurrent Setting
Oper Sequence
>Reclose Intervals
ENTER
>Phase/Neg Seq
Ground
ENTER
>PQOpenInt#1 2.000 PQOpenInt#1 2.000 PQOpenInt#1 2.000

PQOpenInt#2 2.000 >PQOpenInt#2 2.000 PQOpenInt#2 2.000
PQOpenInt#3 5.000 PQOpenInt#3 5.000 >PQOpenInt#3 5.000
ENTER ENTER ENTER
>PQOpenInt#1 (sec) >PQOpenInt#2 (sec) >PQOpenInt#3 (sec)

MIN: 0.30 MAX: 1000 MIN: 1.80 MAX: 1000 MIN: 1.80 MAX: 1000
VALUE: 2.000 VALUE: 2.000 VALUE: 5.000
CANCEL ^ CANCEL ^ CANCEL ^
Press < or > to move the selection cursor to the position underneath the digit you want to change.
PQOpenInt#1 (sec) PQOpenInt#2 (sec) PQOpenInt#3 (sec)

F1 F1 F1
ENTER ENTER ENTER
(or Press F1 to CANCEL) (or Press F1 to CANCEL) (or Press F1 to CANCEL)
>PQOpenInt#1 4.000 PQOpenInt#1 2.000 PQOpenInt#1 2.000
PQOpenInt#2 2.000 >PQOpenInt#2 4.000 PQOpenInt#2 2.000
PQOpenInt#3 5.000 PQOpenInt#3 5.000 >PQOpenInt#3 7.000
MENU
SELECT AN OPTION
FOR THE ALTERED
SETTINGS:
USE REVERT BACK
F1 F2 F4
2-12
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Ground
The Reclose Interval for Ground operations is programmed
independent of the phase/negative Reclose Settings.
>SETTINGS
METERING
SEQUENCE OF EVENTS
ALARM LOG & STATUS
ENTER
>Mod/View Settings
ENTER
ENTER PASSWORD
VALUE: 0
VIEW ONLY CANCEL
F1 ENTER
Edit Profi Norm

Overcurrent Setting
Oper Sequence
>Reclose Intervals
ENTER
Phase/Neg Seq
>Ground
ENTER
>GndOpenInt#1 2.000 GndOpenInt#1 2.000 GndOpenInt#1 2.000

GndOpenInt#2 2.000 >GndOpenInt#2 2.000 GndOpenInt#2 2.000
GndOpenInt#3 5.000 GndOpenInt#3 5.000 >GndOpenInt#3 5.000
ENTER ENTER ENTER
>GndOpenInt#1 (sec) >GndOpenInt#2 (sec) >GndOpenInt#3 (sec)

Press < or > to move the selection cursor to the position underneath the digit you want to change.
GndOpenInt#1 (sec) GndOpenInt#2 (sec) GndOpenInt#3 (sec)

F1 F1 F1
ENTER ENTER ENTER
(or Press F1 to CANCEL) (or Press F1 to CANCEL) (or Press F1 to CANCEL)
>GndOpenInt#1 4.000 GndOpenInt#1 2.000 GndOpenInt#1 2.000
GndOpenInt#2 2.000 >GndOpenInt#2 4.000 GndOpenInt#2 2.000
GndOpenInt#3 5.000 GndOpenInt#3 5.000 >GndOpenInt#3 7.000
MENU
SELECT AN OPTION
FOR THE ALTERED
SETTINGS:
USE REVERT BACK
F1 F2 F4
2-13
Reset Time
Reset Time is the user-settable time delay that is used by
>SETTINGS the control after a successful reclose to reset the sequence
METERING
SEQUENCE OF EVENTS position to zero. Reset after successful reclose occurs when
ALARM LOG & STATUS
the recloser is closed and no overcurrent is detected.
ENTER
>Mod/View Settings
The diagram at the left shows the screen process to pro-
gram the reset time.
ENTER
ENTER PASSWORD
VALUE: 0
VIEW ONLY CANCEL
F1 ENTER
Overcurrent Setting
Oper Sequence
Reclose Intervals
>ResetTime 30.00
ENTER
ResetTime (sec)
MIN: 3.00 MAX: 1800
VALUE: 30.000
CANCEL ^
Press < or > to move the selection

cursor to the position underneath
Press + or - to increase or
decrease the number above the
selection cursor.
ResetTime (sec)
MIN: 3.00 MAX: 1800
VALUE: 32.000
CANCEL ^
F1
ENTER
Overcurrent Setting
Oper Sequence
Reclose Intervals
>ResetTime 32.00
MENU
SELECT AN OPTION
FOR THE ALTERED
SETTINGS:
USE REVERT BACK
F1 F2 F4
2-14
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Cold Load Pickup

Cold Load Pickup (CLPU) is used to prevent inadvertent
>SETTINGS
METERING
trips from occurring during pickup of load current after a
SEQUENCE OF EVENTS
ALARM LOG & STATUS
sustained outage. The CLPU feature is activated when a
ENTER
CLOSE signal is applied to the Form 6 control. The CLPU
>Mod/View Settings
feature is active for a programmed amount of time. During
this activation time, the control will operate on the CLPU
settings for minimum pickup and follow the CLPU TCC
ENTER settings, CLPU reclose interval, and CLPU operations-to-
ENTER PASSWORD lockout.
VALUE: 0 Cold Load Pickup LCD screens allows the user to program
VIEW ONLY CANCEL
the Form 6 control with the settings associated with specific
F1 ENTER
curve characteristics when CLPU is active.
Oper Sequence
Reclose Intervals
Just as in the Overcurrent Protection functions for TCC1
ResetTimes 30.00 and TCC2, CLPU allows you to modify minimum trip set-
>Cold Load Pickup
tings and all TCCs within the curve library (Kyle, ANSI, IEC,
ENTER
and 5 User curves).
>CLPUBlock Yes CLPUBlock Yes
Phase Phase
Ground Ground
Cold Load Pickup modification categories include:
Negative Sequence Negative Sequence
CLPUActTime 20.00 >CLPUActTime 20.00 • Minimum Trip
ENTER ENTER
• Selected TCC
>CLPUBlock CLPUActTime (sec)
• Time Multiplier
PRESS [+] or [-] KEY
Yes
Min: 0.00 MAX: 3600 • Time Adder
VALUE: 20.000
CANCEL CANCEL ^ • Minimum Response Time
+ or - Press < or > to move the selection • High Current Trip
>CLPUBlock
the digit you want to change. • High Current Trip Time Delay
No Press + or - to increase or • CLPU Activation Time Delay
CANCEL decrease the number above the
F4
selection cursor. These settings can be modified from the front panel or the
ENTER CLPUActTime
Min: 0.00
(sec)
MAX: 3600
interface software. Following is a brief description of each.
VALUE: 21.000
>CLPUBlock No CANCEL ^
Phase
Ground F1
ENTER
Negative Sequence
MENU
Phase
SELECT AN OPTION Ground
FOR THE ALTERED Negative Sequence
SETTINGS: >CLPUActTime 21.00
USE REVERT BACK
MENU
F1 F2 F4 SELECT AN OPTION
FOR THE ALTERED
SETTINGS:
USE REVERT BACK
F1 F2 F4
Activating Cold Load Pickup

Cold Load Pickup Blocked is the default setting from the
factory. The above diagram illustrates the screen process of
unblocking CLPU.
CLPU Activation Time Delay

The above diagram illustrates the screen process of setting
the Cold Load Pickup Activation Time Delay.
2-15
CLPU Minimum Trip (for Phase, Ground, and Negative Sequence)

The CLPU Minimum Trip setting defines the Amperes at
which the TCC begins to increment towards a time delayed
trip when CLPU is active.
Note: "P" applies to Phase, "G" applies to Ground, and "Q"
>SETTINGS applies to Negative Sequence.
METERING
SEQUENCE OF EVENTS
ALARM LOG & STATUS Each CLPU Minimum Trip LCD screen will show:
ENTER • the unit of measurement in primary Amperes
>Mod/View Settings
• the absolute minimum to maximum input value range
• the minimum trip threshold value (can be changed
ENTER from the front panel)
ENTER PASSWORD
VALUE: 0 CAUTION: Equipment Damage. Verify the maximum

VIEW ONLY CANCEL
short time recloser limit for the recloser type prior to
F1 ENTER changing minimum trip values. Refer to Reference
Oper Sequence
Reclose Intervals to the recloser under load conditions. T310.0
ResetTime 30.00
>Cold Load Pickup
ENTER
The diagram at the left shows the screen process of setting
CLPUBlock No
the applicable CLPU minimum trip for phase.
>Phase
Ground
Negative Sequence
ENTER
are appropriate for the CT Ratio.
>CLPUPMinTrip 200.0
CLPUPCurve 117
CLPUPMultE Disable
CLPUPMult 1.000 Note: The screen setup is the same for Phase, Ground, and
ENTER Negative Sequence.
CLPUPMinTrip seeHelp
Min: 5.00 MAX: 3200
VALUE: 200.000
CANCEL ^
cursor to the position underneath Before changing
minimum trip values,
decrease the number above the refer to Changing
selection cursor. Overcurrent Protection
CLPUPMinTrip seeHelp Parameters in the Form
Min: 5.00 MAX: 3200
VALUE: 201.000 6 Control Schemes –
CANCEL ^ Settings – Operations
F1 Parameters section of
ENTER
this manual for setting
>CLPUPMinTrip 201.0
range information.
CLPUPCurve 117
CLPUPMultE Disable
CLPUPMult 1.000
MENU
SELECT AN OPTION
FOR THE ALTERED
SETTINGS:
USE REVERT BACK
F1 F2 F4
2-16
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
CLPU Curve Selection Screen

The CLPU curve selection LCD screens allow you to pro-
>SETTINGS gram the Form 6 recloser control with the settings associat-
METERING
SEQUENCE OF EVENTS ed with specific curve characteristics when Cold Load
ALARM LOG & STATUS
Pickup is active. These screens give the user access to 45
ENTER
standard time-current curves, plus five custom curves and
>Mod/View Settings
curve modifiers.
ENTER ing a phase TCC for Cold Load Pickup.
ENTER PASSWORD
VALUE: 0 Negative Sequence.
VIEW ONLY CANCEL
ENTER
Note: "P" applies to Phase, "G" applies to Ground, and "Q"
F1
applies to Negative Sequence.
Oper Sequence
Reclose Intervals Modified time-current curves selected for TCC1 and TCC2
ResetTime 30.00
>Cold Load Pickup
can be used as Cold Load Pickup curves.
ENTER
CLPUBlock No
>Phase
Ground
Negative Sequence
ENTER
CLPUPMinTrip 200.0
>CLPUPCurve 117
CLPUPMultE Disable
CLPUPMult 1.000
ENTER
CLPUPCurve
PRESS [+] or [-] key
117
CANCEL
+ or -
CLPUPCurve
PRESS [+] or [-] key
118
CANCEL
F4
ENTER
CLPUPMinTrip 200.0
>CLPUPCurve 118
CLPUPMultE Disable
CLPUPMult 1.000
MENU
SELECT AN OPTION
FOR THE ALTERED
SETTINGS:
USE REVERT BACK
F1 F2 F4
2-17
CLPU Multiplier
The CLPU Multiplier setting defines a Time Multiplier to
To Enable Multiplier: modify the position of the original TCC in time-current space
>SETTINGS and the ability to enable the multiplier. With the CLPU Time
METERING
SEQUENCE OF EVENTS
Multiplier enabled, the trip time of a given TCC at the mea-
ALARM LOG & STATUS sured current is shifted in time by the specific multiplier.
ENTER
For example, if a curve has an operation time of 40 millisec-
>Mod/View Settings
onds, and a multiplier of 2, the “modified” operation time
would be 80 milliseconds.
ENTER 40 ms x 2 = 80 ms
ENTER PASSWORD
Similarly, if the same curve has an operation time of 5 sec-
VALUE: 0
VIEW ONLY CANCEL onds, the multiplier produces a modified time of 10 seconds.
F1 ENTER 5 sec x 2 = 10 seconds
Oper Sequence The diagram at the left shows the screen process of select-
Reclose Intervals
ResetTime 30.00 ing a multiplier for the phase curve selected as a Cold Load
>Cold Load Pickup Pickup curve.
ENTER
CLPUBlock Yes
>Phase Negative Sequence.
Ground
Negative Sequence When you select the Multiplier parameter, the minimum and
ENTER
To Set Multiplier: maximum selection limits of the setting are displayed.
CLPUPMinTrip 200.0 CLPUPMinTrip 200.0
CLPUPCurve 117 CLPUPCurve 117
>CLPUPMultE Disable CLPUPMultE Disable
CLPUPMult 1.000 >CLPUPMult 1.000
ENTER ENTER
CLPUPMultEnable CLPUPMult
PRESS [+] OR [-] KEY MIN: 0.10 MAX: 25.0
Disable VALUE: 1.000
CANCEL CANCEL ^
+ or - Press < or > to move the selection

CLPUPMultEnable the digit you want to change.
PRESS [+] OR [-] KEY Press + or - to increase or
Enable
CANCEL
selection cursor.
F4 CLPUPMult
ENTER
MIN: 0.10 MAX: 25.0
(or Press F4 to CANCEL) VALUE: 2.000
CANCEL ^
CLPUPMinTrip 200.0
CLPUPCurve 117
F1
>CLPUPMultE Enable ENTER
CLPUPMult 1.000
MENU CLPUPMinTrip 200.0
CLPUPCurve 117
SELECT AN OPTION CLPUPMultE Disable
FOR THE ALTERED >CLPUPMult 2.000
SETTINGS:
USE REVERT BACK MENU
FOR THE ALTERED
SETTINGS:
USE REVERT BACK
F1 F2 F4
2-18
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
CLPU Adder
The CLPU Adder settings define a Time Adder to modify the
To Enable Adder: position of the original TCC in time-current space and the
>SETTINGS ability to enable it. With the CLPU time adder enabled, the
METERING
SEQUENCE OF EVENTS trip time of a given TCC at a measured current is shifted in
ALARM LOG & STATUS
time by the specified additional time. In contrast to the
ENTER
CLPU time multiplier, the CLPU time adder adds a constant
>Mod/View Settings time to the curve, regardless of the unmodified curve.
For example, if a curve has an operate time of 40 ms. and
ENTER a 1 second time adder, the modified operate time is 1.040
ENTER PASSWORD seconds.
VALUE: 0 0.040 seconds + 1 second = 1.040 seconds
VIEW ONLY CANCEL
F1
Similarly, if the same curve has a multiplier of 2 producing
ENTER
an operate time of 5 seconds, the one second time adder
Oper Sequence
Reclose Intervals would produce a modified time of 6 seconds.
ResetTime 30.00
>Cold Load Pickup 5 seconds (2.5 seconds x 2) + 1 second = 6 seconds
ENTER
Note: The CLPU time multiplier takes precedence over the time
CLPUBlock Yes
>Phase
adder.
Ground
Negative Sequence The diagram at the left shows the screen process of select-
ENTER To Set Adder: ing the CLPU Phase Adder. When you select the CLPU
CLPUPMultE Disable CLPUPMultE Disable
Adder parameter, the minimum and maximum selection lim-
CLPUPMult 1.000 CLPUPMult 1.000 its of the setting are displayed.
>CLPUPAddEn Disable CLPUPAddEn Disable
CLPUPAdd 0.000 >CLPUPAdd 0.000
ENTER ENTER Negative Sequence.
CLPUPAddEnable CLPUPAdd
CANCEL CANCEL ^

CLPUPAddEnable the digit you want to change.
PRESS [+] OR [-] KEY Press + or - to increase or
Enable decrease the number above the
CANCEL selection cursor.
F4 CLPUPAdd
ENTER MIN: 0.00 MAX: 30.0
CANCEL ^
CLPUPMultE Disable
CLPUPMult 1.000 F1
>CLPUPAddEn Enable ENTER
CLPUPAdd 0.000 (or Press F1 to CANCEL)
MENU CLPUPMultE Disable
CLPUPMult 1.000
SELECT AN OPTION CLPUPAddEn Disable
FOR THE ALTERED >CLPUPAdd 1.000
SETTINGS:
USE REVERT BACK MENU
FOR THE ALTERED
SETTINGS:
USE REVERT BACK
F1 F2 F4
2-19
CLPU Minimum Response Time Adder

The CLPU Minimum Response Time Adder (CLPUMRTA)
>SETTINGS setting defines a minimum response time that modifies the
METERING
SEQUENCE OF EVENTS shape of the original TCC in time-current space for Cold
ALARM LOG & STATUS
Load Pickup, and the ability to enable the MRTA.
ENTER
>Mod/View Settings
When enabled, the CLPU minimum response time of a
given TCC can be no less that the value of the MRTA.
ENTER TCC Editor II and imported using Form 6 ProView interface
ENTER PASSWORD software included with the control.
VALUE:
VIEW ONLY
0
CANCEL
ENTER
ing the CLPU Phase Minimum Response Time Adder.
F1
When you select CLPUMRTA, the minimum and maximum
Oper Sequence selection limits of the setting are displayed.
Reclose Intervals
ResetTime 30.00
>Cold Load Pickup
Negative Sequence.
ENTER
CLPUBlock Yes
>Phase
Ground
Negative Sequence
ENTER
To Enable Adder: To Set Adder:
CLPUPAddEn Disable CLPUPAddEn Disable

CLPUPAdd 0.000 CLPUPAdd 0.000
>CLPUPMRTAE Disable CLPUPMRTAE Disable
CLPUPMRTA 0.013 >CLPUPMRTA 0.013
ENTER ENTER
CLPUPMRTAEnable CLPUPMRTA
CANCEL CANCEL ^

CLPUPMRTAEnable the digit you want to change.
Enable
CANCEL
selection cursor.
F4 CLPUPMRTA
ENTER
MIN: 0.10 MAX: 30.0
CANCEL ^
CLPUPAddEn Enable
CLPUPAdd 0.000 F1
>CLPUPMRTAE Disable ENTER
CLPUPMRTA 0.013
MENU
CLPUPAddEn Disable
SELECT AN OPTION CLPUPAdd
F1 0.000
FOR THE ALTERED CLPUMRTAE Disable
SETTINGS: >CLPUPMRTA 0.015
USE REVERT BACK
MENU
FOR THE ALTERED
SETTINGS:
USE REVERT BACK
F1 F2 F4
2-20
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
CLPU High Current Trip

The CLPU High Current Trip (HCT) settings define a cold
>SETTINGS
METERING load pickup high current trip setting, a time delay and an
SEQUENCE OF EVENTS
ALARM LOG & STATUS
enable setting to modify the shape of the selected CLPU
ENTER
TCC in time-current space. If Cold Load Pickup HCT is
>Mod/View Settings
enabled, the shape of the TCC at currents beyond the HCT
setting is definite time as defined by the CLPU HCT time
delay.
ENTER
The diagram at the left shows the screen process of selecting
ENTER PASSWORD
phase CLPUHCT. When you select CLPUHCT, the minimum
VALUE:
VIEW ONLY
0
CANCEL
and maximum selection limits of the setting are displayed.
F1 ENTER
Oper Sequence
These diagrams show
Reclose Intervals modified CLPU TCCs with
ResetTime 30.00
>Cold Load Pickup
and without the effects of
ENTER
high current trip.
CLPUBlock Yes
>Phase They also show the
Ground
Negative Sequence
precedence when more
than one modifier is used.
ENTER
To Set
To Enable To Set CLPU High Current
TCC Modifiers without CLPU High Current Trip
CLPU High Current Trip: CLPU High Current Trip: Trip Time Delay: 1) Basic TCC
CLPUPMRTA 0.013 CLPUPMRTA 0.013 CLPUPMRTA 0.013
3) 2x Multiplier
>CLPUHCTEn Disable CLPUHCTEn Disable CLPUHCTEn Disable
CLPUHCT Mul 32.00 >CLPUHCT Mul 32.00 CLPUHCT Mul 32.00 4) 0.08 sec. Time Adder (5 cycles)
CLPUHCTDly 0.016 CLPUHCTDly 0.016 >CLPUHCTDly 0.016
ENTER ENTER ENTER

4
CLPUPHCTEnable CLPUPHCT CLPUPHCTDly (sec)
1 15 cycles
PRESS [+] OR [-] KEY MIN: 1.00 MAX: 32.0 MIN: 0.01 MAX: 0.15
10 cycles
Disable VALUE: 32.000 VALUE: 0.016
CANCEL CANCEL ^ CANCEL ^ 2x Multiplier
Press < or > to move the selection Press < or > to move the selection 3
+ or -
cursor to the position underneath cursor to the position underneath
CLPUPHCTEnable the digit you want to change. the digit you want to change. 5 cycles
PRESS [+] OR [-] KEY Press + or - to increase or Press + or - to increase or
Enable decrease the number above the decrease the number above the 2
CANCEL selection cursor. selection cursor.
F4 CLPUPHCT CLPUPHCTDly (sec)

ENTER
MIN: 1.00 MAX: 32.0 MIN: 0.01 MAX: 0.15 TCC Modifiers With CLPU High Current Trip
(or Press F4 to CANCEL) VALUE: 31.000 VALUE: 0.017 1) Basic TCC
CANCEL CANCEL ^ 2) Minimum Response Time (5 cycles)
CLPUPMRTA 0.013 3) High Current Trip Time Delay
>CLPUPHCTEn Enable Response Time (4 Cycles)
F1 F1
CLPUPHCT 32.00 ENTER ENTER 4) 2x Multiplier
CLPUPHCTDly 0.016 5) 0.1 Second Time Adder
(or Press F1 to CANCEL) (6 cycles) Does not add to High Current Trip
(or Press F1 to CANCEL) Time Delay
MENU CLPUPMRTA 0.013 CLPUPMRTA 0.013
CLPUHCTEn Disable CLPUHCTEn Disable 5
SELECT AN OPTION >CLPUHCT Mul 31.00
2x Multiplier
FOR THE ALTERED CLPUHCT Mul 32.00 16 cycles
CLPUHCTDly 0.016 >CLPUHCTDly 0.017
SETTINGS:
USE REVERT BACK
MENU MENU 10 cycles
8 cycles
F1 F2 F4 4
SELECT AN OPTION SELECT AN OPTION 2
FOR THE ALTERED FOR THE ALTERED 4 5
5 cycles
SETTINGS: SETTINGS: 1 4 cycles
USE REVERT BACK USE REVERT BACK
F1 F2 F4 F1 F2 F4 3
High Current Trip
2-21
Frequency
>SETTINGS
The Frequency Protection feature enables either over or
METERING underfrequency protection, or both simultaneously.
SEQUENCE OF EVENTS
ALARM LOG & STATUS Frequency protection includes two stages to prioritize load-
ENTER shedding feeders.
>Mod/View Settings The Form 6 recloser control ProView interface software pro-
vides an underfrequency restoration feature to allow the
recloser to automatically close when frequency returns with-
ENTER
in configured settings.
ENTER PASSWORD
VALUE: 0
Note: The control does not indicate control lockout if frequency
VIEW ONLY CANCEL restoration is enabled.
ENTER
F1 Note: Automatic restoration from underfrequency loadshed only.
Reclose Intervals Further information on ProView software programming is pro-
ResetTime 30.00
Cold Load Pickup vided in the Using ProView Software section of this manual.
>Frequency
ENTER
>Underfrequency Underfrequency Underfrequency

Overfrequency >Overfrequency Overfrequency
UF Loadshed Restore UF Loadshed Restore > UF Loadshed Restore
ENTER ENTER ENTER
>UFreqEnabl Off >OFreqEnabl Off >FreqRestoreEnable 0

UFreq1PU see 56.00 OFreq1PU see 64.00 Freq:810R:PU 60.04
UFreq1Time 100.0 OFreq1Time 100.0 Freq:62Sched 300.0
UFreq2PU seee 56.00 OFreq2PU see 64.00 Freq:62Trans 0.300
UFreq2Time 100.0 OFreq2Time 100.0 Freq:62Abort 600.0
Activating Frequency Protection

Reclose Intervals
The diagram at the left shows the screen process to acti-
ResetTime 30.00 vate the underfrequency protection feature. The same
Cold Load Pickup
>Frequency process is used to activate overfrequency protection.
ENTER
>Underfrequency
Overfrequency
UF Loadshed Restore
ENTER
>UFreqEnabl Off
UFreq1PU see 56.00
UFreq1Time 100.0
UFreq2PU see 56.00
UFreq2Time 100.0
ENTER
UFreqEnable
Off
CANCEL
+ or -
UFreqEnable
On
CANCEL
F4
ENTER
>UFreqEnabl On
UFreq1PU see 56.00
UFreq1Time 100.0
UFreq2PU see 56.00
MENU
SELECT AN OPTION
FOR THE ALTERED
SETTINGS:
USE REVERT BACK
F1 F2 F4
2-22
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Frequency Pickup
Pickup settings define the frequency at which the frequen-
cy-measuring function begins to operate.
Reclose Intervals
For Underfrequency, pickup operates if the measured fre-
ResetTime 30.00 quency is less than the pickup frequency.
Cold Load Pickup
>Frequency
Note: Upon an underfrequency pickup, the recloser control trips
ENTER the recloser. The control does not indicate control lockout if
>Underfrequency frequency restoration is enabled.
Overfrequency
UF Loadshed Restore For Overfrequency, pickup operates if the measured fre-
quency is greater than the pickup setting.
ENTER
UFreqEnabl Off Note: The front panel (as well as the ProView Interface software)
>UFreq1PU see 56.00 allows you to program two over and two underfrequency
UFreq1Time 100.0
UFreq2PU see 56.00 settings.
ENTER Note: The interface software allows programming of a single over-
UFreq1PU seeHelp for frequency and a single underfrequency alarm.
Min: 46.0 MAX: 64.0
VALUE: 56.000 The diagram at the left shows the screen process to select
CANCEL ^
the pickup settings for Underfrequency Protection. The
cursor to the position underneath same process is followed for Overfrequency Protection.
selection cursor.
UFreq1PU seeHelp for
Min: 46.0 MAX: 64.0
VALUE: 55.000
CANCEL ^
F1
ENTER
UFreqEnabl Off
>UFreq1PU see 55.00
UFreq1Time 100.0
UFreq2PU see 56.00
MENU
SELECT AN OPTION
FOR THE ALTERED
SETTINGS:
USE REVERT BACK
F1 F2 F4
2-23
Frequency Protection Time Delay

Each Frequency function (except alarms) has a user-set-
table, definite time delay function. Two time delays are pro-
Reclose Intervals vided for each over and under frequency function.
ResetTime 30.00
Cold Load Pickup
>Frequency
ing Underfrequency time delay settings. When you select
ENTER
the Time Delay parameter, the minimum and maximum
>Underfrequency
Overfrequency selection limits are displayed. The same process is followed
UF Loadshed Restore
for Overfrequency Protection.
ENTER
UFreqEnabl Off
UFreq1PU see 56.00
>UFreq1Time 100.0
UFreq2PU see 56.00
ENTER
UFreq1Time (sec)
Min: 0.00 MAX: 100.
VALUE: 100.000
CANCEL ^
selection cursor.
UFreq1PU (Hz)
Min: 0.00 MAX: 100.
VALUE: 99.000
CANCEL ^
F1 ENTER
UFreqEnabl Off
UFreq1PU see 56.00
>UFreq1Time 99.00
UFreq2PU see 56.00
MENU
SELECT AN OPTION
FOR THE ALTERED
SETTINGS:
USE REVERT BACK
F1 F2 F4
2-24
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Underfrequency Loadshed Restore

Underfrequency Loadshed Restore allows for restoration
after an underfrequency condition. The frequency function
can be enabled and frequency restoration parameters can
be adjusted and set.
The diagram below shows the screen process of selecting
the Underfrequency Loadshed Restore setting.
The UF LOADSHED RESTORE LCD screen shows the cur-
rent programmed setting and the minimum and maximum
range in Hertz.
Underfrequency
Overfrequency
> UF Loadshed Restore
ENTER
>FreqRestoreEnable 0 FreqRestoreEnable 0 FreqRestoreEnable 0 FreqRestoreEnable 0 Freq:810R:PU 60.00

Freq:810R:PU 60.04 >Freq:810R:PU 60.04 Freq:810R:PU 60.04 Freq:810R:PU 60.04 Freq:62Sched 300.0
Freq:62Sched 300.0 Freq:62Sched 300.0 >Freq:62Sched 300.0 Freq:62Sched 300.0 Freq:62Trans 0.300
Freq:62Trans 0.300 Freq:62Trans 0.300 Freq:62Trans 0.300 >Freq:62Trans 0.300 >Freq:62Abort 600.0
ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER
FreqRestoreEnable N= Freq:810R:PU seeHelp Freq:62Schedule sec) Freq:62Transient sec Freq:62Abort (sec)

PRESS [+] or [-] KEY MIN: 46:0 MAX: 64:0 MIN: 1.00 MAX: 3600 MIN: 0.10 MAX: 3600 MIN: 0.10 MAX: 3600
VALUE: 0 VALUE: 60.050 VALUE: 300.000 VALUE: 0.300 VALUE: 600.000
CANCEL CANCEL ^ CANCEL ^ CANCEL ^ CANCEL ^
+ or - Press < or > to move the selection cursor to the position underneath the digit you want to change.
0 = No 1 = Yes Press + or - to increase or decrease the number above the selection cursor.
FreqRestoreEnable N= Freq:810R:PU seeHelp Freq:62Schedule sec) Freq:62Transient sec Freq:62Abort (sec)

PRESS [+] or [-] KEY MIN: 46:0 MAX: 64:0 MIN: 1.00 MAX: 3600 MIN: 0.10 MAX: 3600 MIN: 0.10 MAX: 3600
VALUE: 1 VALUE: 61.050 VALUE: 305.000 VALUE: 0.320 VALUE: 605.000
CANCEL CANCEL ^ CANCEL ^ CANCEL ^ CANCEL ^
ENTER F4 F1 ENTER F1 ENTER F1 ENTER F1 ENTER
(or Press F4 to CANCEL) (or Press F1 to CANCEL) (or Press F1 to CANCEL) (or Press F1 to CANCEL) (or Press F1 to CANCEL)
>FreqRestoreEnable 1 FreqRestoreEnable 0 FreqRestoreEnable 0 FreqRestoreEnable 0 Freq:810R:PU 60.00
Freq:810R:PU 60.04 >Freq:810R:PU 61.04 Freq:810R:PU 60.04 Freq:810R:PU 60.04 Freq:62Sched 300.0
Freq:62Sched 300.0 Freq:62Sched 300.0 >Freq:62Sched 305.0 Freq:62Sched 300.0 Freq:62Trans 0.300
Freq:62Trans 0.300 Freq:62Trans 0.300 Freq:62Trans 0.300 >Freq:62Trans 0.320 >Freq:62Abort 605.0
MENU
SELECT AN OPTION
FOR THE ALTERED
SETTINGS:
USE REVERT BACK
F1 F2 F4
2-25
Voltage
ResetTime 30.00 Under and Overvoltage settings are used for loss of voltage
Cold Load Pickup
Frequency
detection and/or overvoltage applications.
>Voltage
Undervoltage protection includes both single-phase or
ENTER
three-phase loss of sensing and single-phase trip / three-
>Undervoltage Undervoltage
Overvoltage >Overvoltage phase inhibit.
• Single-phase undervoltage sensing responds when
ENTER ENTER one or more phases is below the pickup setting. This
>UVolt1PEna Off >OVolt1Enabl Off setting must be On: UVolt1PEna
UVolt1P/3P Off OVolt1PPU 16.20
UVolt3PEna Off OVolt1PTime 100.0
UVolt1PPU 11.52 OVolt3PPU 16.20
• Three-phase sensing will only respond when all three
UVolt1PTime 100.0 OVolt3PTime 100.0 phases are below the pickup setting. This setting
UVolt3PPU 11.52
UVolt3PTime 100.0 must be On: Uvolt3PEna
• Single-phase sensing with three-phase inhibit will
respond like single-phase sensing, except it will not
react to a three-phase condition. Both of these set-
tings must be On: UVolt1PEna and UVolt1P/3P
Overvoltage sensing includes single-phase sensing.
Activating Voltage Protection

ResetTime
Cold Load Pickup
30.00 vate the single-phase sensing undervoltage protection fea-
Frequency ture. The same process is used to activate overvoltage
>Voltage
protection.
ENTER
>Undervoltage
Overvoltage
ENTER
>UVolt1PEna Off
UVolt1P/3P Off
UVolt3PEna Off
UVolt1PPU 11.52
ENTER
UVolt1Enable
Off
CANCEL
+ or -
UVolt1PEnable
On
CANCEL
F4
ENTER
>UVolt1PEna On
UVolt1P/3P Off
UVolt3PEna Off
UVolt1PPU 11.52
MENU
SELECT AN OPTION
FOR THE ALTERED
SETTINGS:
USE REVERT BACK
F1 F2 F4
2-26
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Voltage Pickup
Pickup settings define the primary voltage (kV) at which the
voltage-measuring function begins to operate.
ResetTime 30.00 For Undervoltage, the function operates if the measured pri-
Cold Load Pickup
Frequency mary voltage (kV) is less than the pickup voltage.
>Voltage
For Overvoltage, the function operates if the measured pri-
ENTER
mary voltage (kV) is more than the pickup voltage.
>Undervoltage
Overvoltage
Note: The front panel (as well as the software) allows you to pro-
gram single-phase and three-phase under and overvoltage
ENTER pickup settings.
UVolt1PEna Off Note: The interface software allows programming of a single
UVolt1P/3P Off
UVolt3PEna Off undervoltage and overvoltage alarm.
>UVolt1PPU 11.52
The diagram at the left shows the screen process to select
ENTER
the pickup settings for Undervoltage Protection. When you
UVolt1PPU (kVpri)
Min: 0.00 MAX: 200. select the Voltage pickup parameter, the minimum and max-
VALUE: 11.520
CANCEL ^
imum selection limits are displayed. The same process is
Press < or > to move the selection followed for Overvoltage Protection.
selection cursor.
UVolt1PPU (kVpri)
Min: 0.00 MAX: 200.
VALUE: 11.530
CANCEL ^
F1
ENTER
UVolt1PEna Off
UVolt1P/3P Off
UVolt3PEna Off
>UVolt1PPU 11.53
MENU
SELECT AN OPTION
FOR THE ALTERED
SETTINGS:
USE REVERT BACK
F1 F2 F4
2-27
Voltage Protection Time Delay

Each Voltage function (except alarms) has a user-settable,
ResetTime
Cold Load Pickup
30.00 definite time delay function. Single-phase and three-phase
Frequency time delays are provided for each over and undervoltage
>Voltage
function.
ENTER
>Undervoltage The diagram at the left shows the screen process of select-
Overvoltage ing Undervoltage time delay settings. When you select the
Time Delay parameter, the minimum and maximum selec-
ENTER tion limits are displayed. The same process is followed for
UVolt1PPU 11.52 Overvoltage Protection.
>UVolt1PTime 100.0
UVolt3PPU 11.52
UVolt3PTime 100.0
ENTER
UVolt1PTime (sec)
MIN: 0.00 MAX: 100.
VALUE: 100.000
CANCEL ^

selection cursor.
UVolt1PTime (sec)
MIN: 0.00 MAX: 100.
VALUE: 90.000
CANCEL ^
F1
ENTER
UVolt1PPU 11.52
>UVolt1PTime 90.00
UVolt3PPU 11.52
UVolt3PTime 100.0
MENU
SELECT AN OPTION
FOR THE ALTERED
SETTINGS:
USE REVERT BACK
F1 F2 F4
2-28
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Sensitive Earth Fault (SEF)

The Sensitive Earth Fault (SEF) feature is used on 3-wire
Cold Load Pickup systems that require lower, independent minimum trip val-
Frequency
Voltage ues than normal ground sensing 4-wire systems.
>Sensitive Earth Flt
ENTER
Sensitive Earth Fault (SEF) allows the Form 6 recloser con-
>SEFBlock Enable
trol to detect and authorize the recloser to trip after a selec-
SEFMinTrip 40.00 table, definite time for ground currents below minimum trip
SEFTime 120.0
SEFReclInt 2.000 levels. Sensitive Earth Fault has programmable lockout set-
SEFNumOps 4
tings and reclose intervals. Like all the features in the SET-
TINGS menu, Sensitive Earth Fault is independently selec-
table for each protection profile.
Sensitive Earth Fault feature requires four settings once it is
enabled. These settings include Minimum Trip, actual Trip
Time, the Reclose (Open) intervals, and the number of
operations-to-lockout.
Note: When the Ground Trip Blocked feature is Enabled, the
Sensitive Earth Fault feature is Disabled.
The SEF Minimum Trip, Trip Time, and Reclose Interval
LCD screens show:
• Sensitive Earth Fault Block (Enable/Disable)
• Minimum Trip Current Setting
• Sensitive Earth Fault Time Setting
• Reclose Interval Time Setting
• Number of Operations-to-Lockout Setting
Activating Sensitive Earth Fault

Cold Load Pickup
Frequency vate the Sensitive Earth Fault feature.
Voltage
ENTER
>SEFBlock Enable
SEFMinTrip 40.00
SEFTime 120.0
SEFReclInt 2.000
ENTER
SEFBlock
Enable
CANCEL
+ or -
SEFBlock
Disable
CANCEL
F4
ENTER
>SEFBlock Disable
SEFMinTrip 40.00
SEFTime 120.0
SEFReclInt 2.000
MENU
SELECT AN OPTION
FOR THE ALTERED
SETTINGS:
USE REVERT BACK
F1 F2 F4
2-29
SEF Minimum Trip

Cold Load Pickup The Minimum Trip for Sensitive Earth Fault defines the pick-
Frequency
Voltage up setting in Amperes.
ENTER The diagram at the left shows the screen process of setting
SEFBlock Enable the minimum trip for Sensitive Earth Fault.
>SEFMinTrip 40.00
SEFTime 120.0
SEFReclInt 2.000
ENTER
SEFMinTrip (A pri)
MIN: 0.50 MAX: 100.
VALUE: 40.00
CANCEL ^
selection cursor.
SEFMinTrip (A pri)
MIN: 0.50 MAX: 100.
VALUE: 50.00
CANCEL ^
F1
ENTER
SEFBlock Enable
>SEFMinTrip 50.00
SEFTime 120.0
SEFReclInt 2.000
MENU
SELECT AN OPTION
FOR THE ALTERED
SETTINGS:
USE REVERT BACK
F1 F2 F4
SEF Trip Time

Cold Load Pickup Trip Time is the actual, definite time at which the sensitive
Frequency
Voltage earth fault trips the recloser.
ENTER The diagram at the left shows the screen process of setting
SEFBlock Enable the Trip Time for Sensitive Earth Fault.
SEFMinTrip 40.00
>SEFTime 120.0
SEFReclInt 2.000
ENTER
SEFTime (sec)
MIN: 0.10 MAX: 300.
VALUE: 120.000
CANCEL ^
selection cursor.
SEFTime (sec)
MIN: 0.10 MAX: 300.
VALUE: 130.000
CANCEL ^
F1
ENTER
SEFBlock Enable
SEFMinTrip 40.00
>SEFTime 130.00
SEFReclInt 2.000
MENU
SELECT AN OPTION
FOR THE ALTERED
SETTINGS:
USE REVERT BACK
F1 F2 F4
2-30
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
SEF Reclose Interval

Cold Load Pickup Reclose Interval settings define the time delay setting intro-
Frequency
Voltage duced by the control prior to issuing a reclose command to
the recloser.
ENTER
SEFBlock Enable
Note: Sensitive Earth Fault reclose intervals are defined for sensi-
SEFMinTrip 40.00 tive, ground-only initiated reclosing operations.
SEFTime 120.0
>SEFReclInt 2.000
ENTER
ing the SEF Reclose Interval.
>SEFReclInt (sec)
MIN: 1.00 MAX: 100.
VALUE: 2.000
CANCEL ^
selection cursor.
>SEFReclInt (sec)
MIN: 1.00 MAX: 100.
VALUE: 3.000
CANCEL ^
F1
ENTER
SEFBlock Enable
SEFMinTrip 40.00
SEFTime 120.0
>SEFReclInt 3.000
MENU
SELECT AN OPTION
FOR THE ALTERED
SETTINGS:
USE REVERT BACK
F1 F2 F4
SEF Number of Operations-to-Lockout

The diagram at the left shows the screen process of selecting
Cold Load Pickup
the number of operations-to-lockout (maximum 4) for SEF.
Frequency
Voltage
ENTER
SEFMinTrip 40.00
SEFTime 120.0
SEFReclInt 2.000
>SEFNumOps 4
ENTER
SEFNumOps
Press [+] or [-] KEY
4
CANCEL
+ or -
SEFNumOps
Press [+] or [-] KEY
1
CANCEL
F4
ENTER
SEFMinTrip 40.00
SEFTime 120.0
SEFReclInt 2.000
>SEFNumOps 1
MENU
SELECT AN OPTION
FOR THE ALTERED
SETTINGS:
USE REVERT BACK
F1 F2 F4
2-31
Metering Menu
Note: The Metering menu LCD display is a read-only function.
SETTINGS The front panel access to metering settings is limited to
>METERING viewing only. All metering programming is done via
SEQUENCE OF EVENTS
ALARM LOG & STATUS ProView, the Form 6 control interface software.
ENTER
The Form 6 recloser control displays metering data on the
>Inst. Metering
Demand Metering
front panel LCD as well as through the ProView interface
Power Metering software.
Energy Metering
Power Factor
freq = (n/a) Hz
The Metering menu shows:
• Instantaneous Phase and Ground Currents and
Voltages
• Primary Demand and Peak Phase Currents
• Primary Demand and Peak Power Values
• Instantaneous Power Values
METERING Analysis Key • Energy Values
• Instantaneous Power Factor Values
• Frequency
METERING The Metering module calculates and maintains the power-
RESET
TARGETS
related parameters for the forward (out) and reverse (in)
metering directions.
F1 F2 F3 F4
EVENTS
Detailed information on programming Metering data via the
MENU
LAMP TEST interface software is available in the Form 6 Control
Schemes section of this manual.
ENTER Note: As a shortcut, the METERING menu can also be accessed
from the front panel METERING analysis key.
Instantaneous Metering
The front panel read-only LCD display for instantaneous
SETTINGS
metering shows the values for A, B, C phase and Ground.
>METERING
SEQUENCE OF EVENTS The Instantaneous Voltage for each is displayed as Primary
ALARM LOG & STATUS voltage.
ENTER
>Inst. Metering
Demand Metering
Power Metering
Energy Metering
ENTER
IA: 0.VA: 0.
IB: 0.VB: 0.
IC: 0.VC: 0.
IG: 0.0
MENU
2-32
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Demand Metering
The Demand Metering display shows the calculated:
Inst. Metering • Primary Demand and Peak Currents
>Demand Metering
Power Metering • Per phase Demand and Peak real and reactive power
Energy Metering
values
ENTER
>Reset Demand Peaks • Total Demand and Peak real and reactive power values
Demand Phase Amps
Demand Tot kW, kVAr Note: Front panel Demand Metering is a read-only function; how-
Demand kW-out
Demand kW-in ever, Demand Peak Values can be reset from the front
Demand kVAr-out panel.
Demand kVAr-in
MENU All demand-metered power values include measurements in
the forward (out) or reverse (in) direction. As an example,
Demand kW-out displays demand kilowatts in the forward
direction for loads with no co-generation, while forward kW-
in displays demand kilowatts in the reverse direction when
supplied from the co-generator.
Note: Demand Metering values are automatically reset when a
protection mode is changed, a new setting is downloaded
from the PC, or when a scheme is downloaded from the
PC.
Detailed Demand Metering programming information is found
in the Form 6 Control Schemes section of this manual.
Resetting Demand Peak Values

All Demand Peak Values can be reset simultaneously from
SETTINGS the front panel.
>METERING
SEQUENCE OF EVENTS
ALARM LOG & STATUS
The diagram at the left shows the screen process for reset-
ENTER
ting Demand Peak Values.
Inst. Metering Note: After F4 (RESET) is pressed, the phrase “--METERS ARE
>Demand Metering
Power Metering
RESET--” appears in the LCD display for approximately 2
Energy Metering seconds.
ENTER
>Reset Demand Peaks

Demand Phase Amps
Demand Tot kW, kVAr
Demand kW-out
ENTER
>Push RESET to reset >Push RESET to reset

all Demand Peaks. all Demand Peaks.
Push MENU to abort. OR Push MENU to abort.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RESET
F4 MENU (abort)
Press F4 and hold.
>Push RESET to reset >Reset Demand Peaks

all Demand Peaks. Demand Phase Amps
Push MENU to abort. Demand Tot kW, kVAR
-- METERS ARE RESET-- Demand kW-out
>Push RESET to reset

all Demand Peaks.
Push MENU to abort.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RESET
MENU (abort)
>Reset Demand Peaks

Demand Phase Amps
Demand Tot kW, kVAr
Demand kW-out
2-33
Demand Amps per Phase

Reset Demand Peaks The diagram at the left shows the screen process for view-
>Demand Phase Amps
Demand Tot kW, kVAr ing the Demand Phase Amps (Demand and Peak) and the
Demand kW-out Demand Phase Amps Time of Peak for each phase.
ENTER
>Apri Demand Peak >Push ENTER for Time

A-> 0. 0. A-> 0. 0.
B-> 0. 0. B-> 0. 0.
C-> 0. 0. C-> 0. 0.
MENU Press v to move the selection cursor

to the position next to the phase you
want to view the timestamp for.
Apri Demand Peak
>A-> 0. 0.
B-> 0. 0.
C-> 0. 0.
ENTER
>2003-06-12 14:13:15
A->
Demand Phase Amps
Time of Peak
MENU
Demand and Total Power Values

Reset Demand Peaks The diagram at the left shows the screen process for view-
Demand Phase Amps
>Demand Tot kW, kVAr
ing the Demand Tot kW, kVAr (Demand and Peak) and the
Demand kW-out Demand Tot kW, kVAr Time of Peak for kW, and kVAr.
ENTER
>pri Demand Peak >pri Demand Peak

kW 0. 0 kW 0. 0
kVAr 0. 0 kVAr 0. 0
Push ENTER for Time Push ENTER for Time

pri Demand Peak
>kW 0. 0
kVAr 0. 0
Push ENTER for Time
ENTER
>2003-06-12 07:15:03
kW
Demand Tot kW, kVAr
Time of Peak
MENU
Demand Real Power-Out

Reset Demand Peaks
The diagram at the left shows the screen process for view-
Demand Phase Amps ing the Demand kW-out (Demand and Peak) and the
Demand Tot kW, kVAr
>Demand kW-out Demand kW-out Time of Peak for each phase.
ENTER
>kW-out Demand Peak >Push ENTER for Time

A-> 0. 0 A-> 0. 0.
B-> 0. 0 B-> 0. 0.
C-> 0. 0 C-> 0. 0.

kW-out Demand Peak
>A-> 0. 0
B-> 0. 0
C-> 0. 0
ENTER
>2003-06-12 12:44:07
A->
Demand kW-out
Time of Peak
MENU
2-34
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Demand Real Power-In

Demand Phase Amps
Demand Tot kW, kVAr
Demand kW-out ing the Demand kW-in (Demand and Peak) and the
>Demand kW-in
Demand kW-in Time of Peak for each phase.
ENTER
>kW-in Demand Peak >Push ENTER for Time

A-> 0. 0 A-> 0. 0.
B-> 0. 0 B-> 0. 0.
C-> 0. 0 C-> 0. 0.

kW-in Demand Peak
>A-> 0. 0
B-> 0. 0
C-> 0. 0
ENTER
>2003-06-12 12:44:03
A->
Demand kW-in
Time of Peak
MENU
Demand Reactive Power-Out

Demand Tot kW, kVAr
Demand kW-out ing the Demand kVAr-out (Demand and Peak) and the
Demand kW-in
>Demand kVAr-out Demand kVAr-out Time of Peak for each phase.
ENTER
kVAr-out Demand Pk >Push ENTER for Time

A-> 0. 0 A-> 0. 0.
B-> 0. 0 B-> 0. 0.
C-> 0. 0 C-> 0. 0.

kVAr-out Demand Peak
>A-> 0. 0
B-> 0. 0
C-> 0. 0
ENTER
>2003-06-12 07:15:03
A->
Demand kVAr-out
Time of Peak
MENU
Demand Reactive Power-In

Demand kW-out The diagram at the left shows the screen process for view-
Demand kW-in
Demand kVAr-out ing the Demand kVAr-in (Demand and Peak) and the
>Demand kVAr-in Demand kVAr-in Time of Peak for each phase.
ENTER
kVAr-in Demand Peak >Push ENTER for Time

A-> 0. 0 A-> 0. 0.
B-> 0. 0 B-> 0. 0.
C-> 0. 0 C-> 0. 0.

kVAr-in Demand Peak
>A-> 0. 0
B-> 0. 0
C-> 0. 0
ENTER
>2003-06-12 07:15:03
A->
Demand kVAr-in
Time of Peak
MENU
2-35
Power Metering
SETTINGS The Power Metering LCD screen shows the calculated
>METERING
SEQUENCE OF EVENTS instantaneous Real Power (kW) (diagram at left) and
ALARM LOG & STATUS Reactive Power (kVAr) values for each phase and the Total
ENTER Instantaneous Real and Reactive power value of all three
Inst. Metering
Demand Metering
phases.
>Power Metering
Energy Metering Detailed Power Metering programming information is found
ENTER in the Form 6 Control Schemes section of this manual.
kWA = 0.0
kWB = 0.0
kWC = 0.0
kWT = 0.
kVArA = 0.0
kVArB = 0.0
kVArC = 0.0
kVArT = 0.0
MENU
Energy Metering
SETTINGS
>METERING
The Energy Metering LCD screen shows the calculated
SEQUENCE OF EVENTS instantaneous Real Energy (kW) and Reactive Energy
ALARM LOG & STATUS
(kVAr) values for each phase and the Total Real and
ENTER
Reactive Energy value of all three phases.
Inst. Metering
Demand Metering
Power Metering
Detailed Energy Metering programming information is found
>Energy Metering in the Form 6 Control Schemes section of this manual.
ENTER
>Reset Energy Meters

Energy Meters (Out)
Energy Meters (In)
MENU
Resetting Energy Meters

SETTINGS Both Energy Meters (Out) and (In) can be reset simultane-
>METERING
SEQUENCE OF EVENTS ously from the front panel.
ALARM LOG & STATUS
ENTER The diagram at the left shows the screen process for reset-
Inst. Metering ting the Energy Meters.
Demand Metering
Power Metering Note: After F4 (RESET) is pressed, the phrase “--METERS ARE
>Energy Metering
RESET--” appears in the LCD display for approximately 2
ENTER
seconds.
Energy Meters (Out)
Energy Meters (In)
ENTER

all Energy meters. OR all Energy meters.
Push MENU to abort. Push MENU to abort.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RESET
F4
Press F4 and hold. MENU (abort)
>Push RESET to reset >Reset Energy Meters

all Energy meters. Energy Meters (Out)
Push MENU to abort. Energy Meters (In)
-- METERS ARE RESET--

all Energy meters.
Push MENU to abort.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RESET
MENU (abort)

Energy Meters (Out)
Energy Meters (In)
2-36
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Energy Meters (Out) and (In)

The Energy Meters (Out) and (In) LCD screen shows the
SETTINGS
>METERING calculated instantaneous Real energy (kWH) (in diagram at
SEQUENCE OF EVENTS
ALARM LOG & STATUS left) and Reactive energy (kVArH) measurements for each
ENTER phase and the total Instantaneous Real and Reactive ener-
Inst. Metering gy measurement of all three phases.
Demand Metering
Power Metering The Total Phase value updates automatically when the
>Energy Metering
three individual phases are updated.
ENTER
Reset Energy Meters Reset Energy Meters

>Energy Meters (Out) Energy Meters (Out)
Energy Meters (In) >Energy Meters (In)
ENTER ENTER
>Energy Meters (Out) >Energy Meters (In)

kWHA = 0. kWHA = 0.
kWHB = 0. kWHB = 0.
kWHC = 0. kWHC = 0.
kWHT = 0. kWHT = 0.
kVArHA = 0. kVArHA = 0.
kVArHB = 0. kVArHB = 0.
kVArHC = 0. kVArHC = 0.
kVArHT = 0. kVArHT = 0.
Power Factor
The front panel read-only Power Factor screen shows the
SETTINGS
Instantaneous power factor (pf) of each individual phase
>METERING and the Total power factor (pfT) of all three phases.
SEQUENCE OF EVENTS
ALARM LOG & STATUS
ENTER
Demand Metering
Power Metering
Energy Metering
>Power Factor
ENTER
Inst pfA = 0.00

Inst pfB = 0.00
Inst pfC = 0.00
Inst pfT = 0.00
Frequency
Frequency, a read-only display, is automatically updated
and displayed in the METERING menu. The phase or phas-
SETTINGS
>METERING es are selected via the ProView interface software in the
SEQUENCE OF EVENTS
ALARM LOG & STATUS Configure / System Configuration screen based on the PT
ENTER Connection: Wye or Delta.
Power Metering
Energy Metering
When “freq = (n/a) Hz” is displayed, no voltage is present
Power Factor on the selected phase or phases.
>freq = (n/a) Hz
2-37
Sequence of Events Menu

SETTINGS
The Form 6 recloser control displays the last 25 events
METERING records in the Sequence of Events log on the front panel
>SEQUENCE OF EVENTS
ALARM LOG & STATUS LCD as well as through the ProView interface software.
ENTER
The Sequence of Events menu shows:
>ENTER to view SOE
• Event Definition
• Date of Event Year/Month/Day
ENTER
• Time of Event
1 CTL CKT INTRRUPT
03/05/14 07:22:47.5
A 0B 0C 0
Event
Example
• A, B, and C Phase Current
G 0 A 0B 0C 0
Press v to scroll to the next event.
• Ground Current
• A, B, and C Phase Voltage (secondary Volts)
EVENTS Analysis Key Sequence of Events (SOE) definitions are available in the
Form 6 Control Schemes - Display section of this manual.
Note: As a shortcut, the Sequence of Events Log can also be
accessed from the EVENTS analysis key on the front panel.
METERING
RESET
TARGETS
F1 F2 F3 F4
EVENTS
LAMP TEST
MENU +
ENTER —
Alarm Log and Status Menu

The Alarm Log and Status Menu is a read-only display
SETTINGS
METERING showing if an alarm is active for the following settings:
SEQUENCE OF EVENTS
>ALARM LOG & STATUS • Trip Malfunction
ENTER 0 = No Alarm • Close Malfunction
1 = Alarm condition
>Reset Alarms is present • Interrupter Malfunction
Trip Malfunction . . . . . . 0
Close Malfunction . . . . . 0 • Loss of Sensing (Only displayed when three-phase
Interrupter Malf . . . . . . 0
Loss of Sensing . . . . . . 0 current is present and the applicable PTs are config-
Power Supply Malf . . . . 0
Sync Close Alarm . . . . . 0 ured to be connected. Refer to Configure - System
RAM Failure . . . . . . . .
ROM Failure . . . . . . . .
0
0
Configuration section for additional information.)
Battery Alarm . . . . . . . 0
No AC Present . . . . . . 0
• Power Supply Malfunction
HLT Close Attempt . . . . 0
Self-Clear Fault . . . . . . 0
• Sync Close Alarm
LoadSide PT Error . . . . 0
CT Ratio Error . . . . . . 0 • RAM Failure
RIF Comm Failure . . . . 0
• ROM Failure
• Battery Alarm (Only available for Form 6 pole mount
controls.) The Pole Mounted Control box in the
ProView System Configuration screen must be
selected.
2-38
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
• No AC Present (Only available for Form 6 pole mount
controls. The Pole Mounted Control box in the
ProView System Configuration screen must be
selected. Refer to Configure - System
Configuration section for additional information.)
• Hot Line Tag Close Attempt
• Self-Clear Fault
• Load Side PT Error
• CT Ratio Error
• RIF Comm Failure
There are two types of Status Alarms:
• Control Alarm – Signified by the continuous illumina-
tion of the Alarm LED. These are Control Alarms:
• Power Supply Malfunction
• RAM Failure
• ROM Failure
• Battery Alarm
• Load side PT Error
ALARMS Analysis Key • CT Ratio Error
• No AC Present (pole mount only)
SETTINGS
OPER • RIF Comm Failure

COUNTER
F1 F2 F3 F4
• System Alarm – Signified by the flashing Alarm LED.
ALARMS These are System Alarms:
MENU + CHANGE • Trip Malfunction
• Close Malfunction
ENTER — • Interrupter Malfunction
• Loss of Sensing
• Sync Close Alarm
• Hot Line Tag Close Attempt
• Self-Clear Fault
Note: As a shortcut, the ALARM menu can also be accessed from
the ALARMS analysis key on the front panel.
Resetting Alarms
>Reset Alarms
The Alarm settings listed in the LCD display can be reset
Close Malfunction . . . . . 0 from the front panel. The diagram shows the screen
process to reset control parameter alarms.
ENTER
>Push RESET to reset >Push RESET to reset Note: After F4 (RESET) is pressed, the phrase “--ALARMS ARE
all alarms. OR all alarms. RESET--” appears in the LCD display for approximately 2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RESET seconds.
Press F4 and hold.

F4
MENU (abort)
The alarm will only reset if the condition that triggered the
>Push RESET to reset >Reset Alarms
alarm is no longer present.
all Demand Peaks. Trip Malfunction . . . . . . 1
Push MENU to abort. Close Malfunction . . . . . 0
-- ALARMS ARE RESET-- Interrupter Malf . . . . . . 0

all alarms.
Push MENU to abort.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RESET
MENU (abort)
>Reset Alarms
Close Malfunction . . . . . 0
2-39
Counters Menu
Counters are part of the historical data record within the
METERING
SEQUENCE OF EVENTS Form 6 Recloser control. The Form 6 control contains
ALARM LOG & STATUS
>COUNTERS
counter data saved in non-volatile memory, and is reset-
ENTER
table from the front panel. Counters display the cumulative
>Reset Target Cntrs
number of operations for specific functions.
Trip Counter 0
A Ph Targ Cntr 0 The counters increment each time an operation takes place,
B Ph Targ Cntr 0
C Ph Targ Cntr 0
independent of any time interval. The LCD display is a
Gnd Targ Cntr 0 read-only function and is limited to viewing only. Counters
SEF Targ Cntr 0
Reset Trip Counter can be reset locally from the front panel or through the
Form 6 ProView Interface software.
The counters are:
• Trip Operations Counter
SETTINGS
• A-Phase, B-Phase, C-Phase, Ground, and Sensitive
OPER
Earth Fault Target Counters
COUNTER
Note: As a shortcut, the COUNTERS menu can also be accessed
F1 F2 F3 F4
ALARMS
from the OPER COUNTER analysis key on the front panel.
MENU + CHANGE
ENTER —
OPER COUNTER Analysis Key
Resetting Counters
Trip and Target Counters are preset at the factory to zero. If
SETTINGS the Form 6 recloser control is replacing another Cooper
METERING
>COUNTERS Power Systems control, the counters can be set to match
I/O CONTROL
the counter of the current control. Programming information
ENTER
for counters and targets is found in the Form 6 Control
>Reset Target Cntrs
Trip Counter 4
C Ph Targ Cntr
Gnd Targ Cntr
0
0
Schemes section of this manual.
A Ph Targ Cntr 4 SEF Targ Cntr 0
B Ph Targ Cntr 4 > Reset Trip Counter The diagram at the left shows the screen process for reset-
ENTER ENTER ting Trip and Target Counters.
Target Counters. the Trip counter.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RESET
F4 F4
Press F4 and hold. Press F4 and hold.

COUNTERS ARE RESET COUNTER IS RESET

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RESET
MENU (abort) MENU (abort)
>Reset Counters C Ph Targ Cntr 0

Trip Counter 4 Gnd Targ Cntr 0
A Ph Targ Cntr 0 SEF Targ Cntr 0
B Ph Targ Cntr 0 > Reset Trip Counter
2-40
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Battery Menu (Pole-Mount Control Only)

The Form 6 Pole-Mounted Recloser control contains a bat-
SEQUENCE OF EVENTS tery. The Battery LCD shows the following information:
ALARM LOG & STATUS
COUNTERS
>BATTERY
• Battery Voltage
ENTER • Battery Current
>VBat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.0
IBat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.00 • Battery Test Command
Test Battery
For battery testing to be available, the Pole Mounted
Control box in the ProView System Configuration screen
must be selected. This includes both pole and substation
applications. Refer to Configure - System Configuration
section for additional information.
Test the Battery

The condition of the Form 6 pole-mount control battery can
be determined by using the Battery Test function in the
BATTERY MENU. No external current/voltage meter is nec-
SEQUENCE OF EVENTS
ALARM LOG & STATUS essary for testing.
COUNTERS
>BATTERY Note: The battery test is blocked for 60 seconds upon power up
ENTER of the control or any setting changes.
>VBat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.0 VBat = Volts Note: AC power can be either connected or disconnected for bat-
IBat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.00 IBat = Amps
Test Battery tery test.
1. Press the MENU button on the front panel.
ENTER
VBat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.0 2. Using the down arrow key, navigate to the BATTERY
IBat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.00
>Test Battery
menu and press ENTER.
3. Using the down arrow key, navigate to the TEST
ENTER
BATTERY menu and press ENTER.
>Push TEST to test
VBat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.0
IBat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.00
4. Press the F4 button to test the battery.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TEST
Note: This message will appear on the programming panel
Press F4. F4 LCD display: ----TESTING----
>Push TEST to test The battery test results will display in the battery
VBat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.0
IBat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.00
metering menu.
TESTING
Note: Voltage should be between 25–31 Vdc with the high-
MENU Test duration is
approximately
er voltage at colder temperatures.
VBat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.0 five seconds.
IBat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.00 Under normal conditions, with AC connected and a
>Test Battery
fully charged battery, the charging current should be
less than 20 mA.
With AC connected and a discharged battery the cur-
rent range should be 20–450 mA.
With AC disconnected and the battery supplying the
load, current will read -400 to -600 mA depending on
connected accessories. (On the LCD it will display as
-0.40 to -0.60.)
2-41
DNP Protocol Menu

The DNP Protocol Menu is a read-only display showing the
ALARM LOG & STATUS
COUNTERS
communication settings for the following categories:
BATTERY
>DNP PROTOCOL • RBE Master: Displays the address of the dedicated
ENTER Unsolicited Master. This is the only master that will be
>RBE Master 1234
addressed while the Form 6 control is in USR mode.
IED Slave 1
Comm Port Rear232 • IED Slave: Displays the DNP3 communications
Baud Rate
8 - No parity -
9600
1
address of the Form 6 control.
• Comm Port: Identifies the selected Form 6 control
rear communications port.
• Baud Rate: Displays the DNP3 protocol baud rate.
This is the Form 6 control communications port
speed (data transmission in Bits per second).
• Serial Line Configuration
The name of this menu changes to reflect the active com-
munication protocol (i.e. DNP-TCP-IP, 2179, IEC870-5-101,
Modbus).
2-42
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Workbench Menu
COUNTERS
The Workbench screen provides access to custom user
BATTERY
DNP PROTOCOL
messages, custom analog data, status data, virtual switch-
>WORKBENCH es, and Workbench name information that is configured as
part of the Idea WorkbenchTM.
>WORKBENCH MESSAGES
WORKBENCH ANALOGS
WORKBENCH STATUS
WORKBENCH SWITCHES
WORKBENCH NAME . . .
>WORKBENCH MESSAGES WORKBENCH MESSAGES WORKBENCH MESSAGES WORKBENCH MESSAGES WORKBENCH ANALOGS
WORKBENCH ANALOGS >WORKBENCH ANALOGS WORKBENCH ANALOGS WORKBENCH ANALOGS WORKBENCH STATUS
WORKBENCH STATUS WORKBENCH STATUS >WORKBENCH STATUS WORKBENCH STATUS WORKBENCH SWITCHES
WORKBENCH SWITCHES WORKBENCH SWITCHES WORKBENCH SWITCHES >WORKBENCH SWITCHES >WORKBENCH NAME . . .
ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER
There Are No >Analog #01 = 0.000 >0=MMI (#01) = status >Momentary Switch #1 WORKBENCH NAME . . .
Active Analog #02 = 0.000 0=MMI (#02) = status Momentary Switch #2 Form6
User Analog #03 = 0.000 0=MMI (#03) = status Momentary Switch #3
Messages Analog #04 = 0.000 0=MMI (#04) = status Momentary Switch #4
Analog #05 = 0.000 0=MMI (#05) = status
MENU 0=MMI (#07) = status ENTER MENU
Analog #07 = 0.000
>WORKBENCH MESSAGES 0=MMI (#09) = status >Push YES to operate >WORKBENCH MESSAGES
WORKBENCH ANALOGS 0=MMI (#10) = status Push MENU to abort. WORKBENCH ANALOGS
MENU 0=MMI (#11) = status
WORKBENCH STATUS Momentary Switch #1 WORKBENCH STATUS
WORKBENCH SWITCHES 0=MMI (#12) = status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . YES WORKBENCH SWITCHES
>WORKBENCH MESSAGES 0=MMI (#13) = status
WORKBENCH ANALOGS 0=MMI (#14) = status
0=MMI (#15) = status F4
WORKBENCH STATUS
WORKBENCH SWITCHES 0=MMI (#16) = status
>Push YES to operate
MENU Push MENU to abort.
Momentary Switch #1
– – – –(OPERATING!)– – – –
>WORKBENCH MESSAGES
WORKBENCH ANALOGS MENU
WORKBENCH STATUS
WORKBENCH SWITCHES
>WORKBENCH MESSAGES
WORKBENCH ANALOGS
WORKBENCH STATUS
WORKBENCH SWITCHES
• Workbench Messages: Displays user-configured mes-

sages. Refer to Workbench Message Outputs to
MMI in the Workbench section of this manual for
message customization information.
• Workbench Analogs: Displays Workbench configured
analog measurements. Refer to Workbench Analog
Outputs to MMI in the Workbench section of this
manual for description customization information.
• Workbench Status: Displays Workbench configured
status points for user-defined Sequence of Events.
Refer to the Workbench Status Outputs to MMI
and SOE and Workbench Outputs Toolbox sec-
tions of this manual for additional information.
• Workbench Switches: Accesses Workbench config-
ured virtual switches. Refer to MMI Softkey
Switches in the Workbench section of this manual
for description customization information.
• Workbench Name: Displays the user-defined
Workbench Description. Refer to Workbench
Description in the Workbench section of this manu-
al for description customization information.
2-43
Clock Menu
The perpetual clock in the Form 6 recloser control is preset
BATTERY
DNP PROTOCOL
at the factory. The LCD display shows the year, month,
WORKBENCH date, hour, minutes, and seconds.
>CLOCK
ENTER The diagram at left shows the screen process for changing
>2003-06-12 15:19:11 the clock.
ENTER
>2003-06-12 15:19:11
^
CANCEL

selection cursor.
>2003-06-13 15:19:11
^
CANCEL
F4
ENTER
>2003-06-13 15:19:11
MENU
BATTERY
DNP PROTOCOL
WORKBENCH
>CLOCK
2-44
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Fault Locator Menu

Fault Locator provides the following information:
DNP PROTOCOL
WORKBENCH
CLOCK • Date and Time Stamp
>FAULT LOCATOR
• Primary fault current
ENTER
>----------------------------------------
• Fault duration
I Flt - pri = (n/a)
Duration - cy = (n/a) • Approximate distance of a fault from the Form 6
>Distance - mi = (n/a)
Fault Type = (n/a) recloser control
• Type of fault
Note: The Fault Locator will only provide the Distance and Fault
Type information when three voltages are supplied and all
three boxes for Connected PTs (Wye/Delta) are checked.
The front panel LCD screen FAULT LOCATOR identifies the
estimated distance from the control. The fault location algo-
rithm performs the fault location calculation based on sys-
tem quantities set in the Form 6 control interface software.
Refer to Configure / System Configuration in the Form 6
Control Schemes section of this manual.
These fault location algorithms are used:
• Takagi
• Takagi (No Preflt)
• Reactance
If a fault location cannot be determined, no event is record-
ed and the display reads:
FAULT=noflt
2-45
Diagnostics Menu
The Diagnostics screen displays the current status of the
recloser connected to the Form 6 recloser control.
WORKBENCH
CLOCK
These are specific signals displayed to the user in real time.
FAULT LOCATOR
>DIAGNOSTICS • Trip Signal
ENTER
0 = Recloser is not in the process of issuing a trip
Trip Signal
Close Signal
. . . . . . . 0
. . . . . . 0
signal.
Reclose Interval . . 0
Sequence Position . 0 1 = Recloser is in the process of issuing a trip signal.
Act Recl Int 2.0s
• Close Signal
MENU
0 = Recloser is not in the process of issuing a close
signal.
1 = Recloser is in the process of issuing a close
signal.
• Reclose Interval (time between fault interruptions)
0 = Control is not in the reclosing interval.
1 = Control is in the reclosing interval.
• Sequence Position
0 = Recloser is at the HOME position.
1 = Recloser is tripping once in the sequence.
2 = Recloser is tripping twice in the sequence.
3 = Recloser is tripping three times in the sequence.
4 = Recloser is tripping four times in the sequence.
• Actual Recloser Interval
#s = Next reclose interval as configured by the user.
2-46
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
I/O Control Menu

The I/O Control screens let you verify the operation of the
output contacts of the Form 6 recloser control. The back
panel of the Form 6 control contains output connections
(CO1 through CO12, and SS1). These contacts can be acti-
vated from the front panel LCD display through the I/O
Control menu.
The diagram above shows the screen process of activating
contact outputs 1 through 12 and the Solid State Contact
(SS1) for testing.
Pressing the applicable soft-key (F1, F2, F3, F4) opens and
closes the contact.
Note: If the active scheme is driving one of these outputs, the
contact will remain in the Active condition.
Pressing MENU returns the display to the previous screen.
CLOCK
FAULT LOCATOR
DIAGNOSTICS
>I/O CONTROL
ENTER
>Activate Out 1-4 Activate Out 1-4 Activate Out 1-4 Activate Out 1-4
Activate Out SS1 >Activate Out SS1 Activate Out SS1 Activate Out SS1
Activate Out 5-8 Activate Out 5-8 >Activate Out 5-8 Activate Out 5-8
Activate Out 9-12 Activate Out 9-12 Activate Out 9-12 >Activate Out 9-12
>Push a soft-key to >Push a soft-key to >Push a soft-key to >Push a soft-key to

activate output. activate output. activate output. activate output.
Push MENU to abort. Push MENU to abort. Push MENU to abort. Push MENU to abort.
CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4 SS1 CO5 CO6 CO7 CO8 CO9 CO10 CO11 CO12
F1 F2 F3 F4 F1 F1 F2 F3 F4 F1 F2 F3 F4
MENU MENU MENU MENU
CAUTION: System Misoperation. Check the output con-

tacts wiring on the back panel prior to operating I/O Control
from the LCD panel. Verify that operation of the contact
outputs will not cause a system misoperation. T309.0
Control Output Connections

CI1 CI2 CI3 SS1 CO1 CO2 CO3 CO4
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19
Note: TB3 and TB4 are optional I/Os.
TB1
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18
CI4 CI5 CI6 CI7 CI8 CI9 CI10 CI11 CO5 CO6 CO7 CO8 CO9 CO10 CO11 CO12
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 1 3 5 7 9 11 13
TB3 TB4
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 2 4 6 8 10 12
2-47
I/O Status Menu

The I/O Status screen displays the contact status of the
FAULT LOCATOR
DIAGNOSTICS input connections and output contacts. The back panel of
I/O CONTROL
>I/O STATUS
the Form 6 recloser control contains input connections (CI1
ENTER
through CI11) and output contacts (CO1 through CO12,
>View Contact Inputs View Contact Inputs
plus SS1) that can be monitored from the front panel LCD
View Contact Output >View Contact Output display.
• 1 = Active
ENTER ENTER
C 11 C S 11
• 0 = Inactive
I 123 45678901 O 1234S 56789012
000 00000000 01110 00100001
MENU
Note: CO1 (TB1-11, -12, -13) is a Form-C contact.

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 CO2 (TB1-14, -15) is a Form-B (normally closed)
contact. Therefore, an active (energized) state
TB1
will provide an open contact.
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 1 3 5 7 9 11 13
TB3 TB4
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 2 4 6 8 10 12
Note: TB3 and TB4 are optional I/Os.

CO6 (TB3-19, -20, -21) and CO12 (TB4-11, -12, -13)
are Form-C contacts.
2-48
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Self-Clear Fault Menu

DIAGNOSTICS
I/O CONTROL
I/O STATUS
>SELF-CLEAR FAULT: N
ENTER
>View SC Fault Stats View SC Fault Stats

Reset SC Fault Data >Reset SC Fault Data
ENTER ENTER
Phase I Rate I Count >Push Softkeys to >Push Softkeys to

A 0.0% 0. clear SC Fault data. clear SC Fault data.
B 0.0% 0. Push MENU to abort. Push MENU to abort.
C 0.0% 0. PhsA PhsB PhsC All PhsA PhsB PhsC All
MENU MENU (abort)
F1 F2 F3 F4
>View SC Fault Stats View SC Fault Stats
Press F1, F2, F3, or F4 and hold.
Reset SC Fault Data >Reset SC Fault Data
>Push Softkeys to
clear SC Fault data.
Push MENU to abort.
All Data are Reset
The Self Clear Fault menu provides access to the following

information (per phase) used for monitoring incipient cable
splice failures due to moisture ingress:
SELF-CLEAR FAULT: N or Y (N = No, Y = Yes) This indi-
cates if there is any self-clear fault data.
Rate % = Self clear fault occurrence rate. This indicates
how close the device is towards an alarm condition. 100%
would indicate that an alarm condition has been reached.
Count = Total counter of number of characteristic waveform
signatures detected.
The incipient cable splice fault detector algorithm recog-
nizes the unique waveform characteristics that occur in the
days preceding a pending cable splice failure due to water
ingress. By monitoring how often this waveform footprint
occurs over time, the user can obtain a highly reliable indi-
cator of impending cable splice faults.
Before a cable splice fails, water seeps into the splice caus-
ing a line-to-ground fault. The resulting fault current causes
a sudden burst of gas that extinguishes the fault. The result
is a waveform that is approximately a 1/4 cycle self-extin-
guishing fault.
The second characteristic of incipient cable splice faults is
that they occur with increasing frequency over time. The
incipient cable splice fault detector algorithm provides the
ability to sense the total number of occurrences as well as
the number of occurrences that occur during a programma-
ble time period.
Note: Occasionally, a current limiting fuse operation can generate
a waveform that will be counted by the incipient cable splice
fault detector. However, these events will be very limited in
number compared to the number of counts that will occur
prior to an actual cable splice failure.
2-49
Test Modes Menu

The Test Modes menu allows the user to conduct tests on
I/O CONTROL the Form 6 control.
I/O STATUS
SELF-CLEAR FAULT: N
>TEST MODES Enabling Test Mode and Disabling the Target Counter pre-
ENTER vents the control from counting test operations and record-
ENTER PASSWORD
ing tests as actual recloser operations.
VALUE: 0 The diagram shows the screen process to enable and dis-
VIEW ONLY CANCEL
able the accumulators and/or targets.
F1 ENTER
(or Press F1 to VIEW ONLY) Note: When in Test Mode, the Sequence of Events recorder will
>Test Mode Off Test Mode Off
continue to record any Events.
Targ Cntr On >Targ Cntr On
ENTER ENTER
Test Mode Targ Cntr

PRESS [+] OR [-] KEY PRESS [+] OR [-] KEY
Off On
CANCEL CANCEL
Press + or - to Press + or - to
toggle the Test Mode F4 toggle the Targ Cntr F4
On and Off. On and Off.
ENTER
>Test Mode On Test Mode On

Targ Cntr On >Targ Cntr Off
MENU
2-50
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Nameplate Data Screen

The Nameplate screen displays the following Form 6 reclos-
I/O STATUS er control information:
SELF-CLEAR FAULT: N
TEST MODES
>NAMEPLATE DATA
• Scheme Identification Number
ENTER • Custom Engineered Scheme Number
Scheme #: 6B14000001
CustEng#: Standard • Control Firmware Date Code
DateCode: YEAR.MM.DD
Proview Ver: 4.0 • ProView Version Number
MENU
2-51
2-52
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Section 3: Using ProViewTM Software

Introduction
WARNING: Equipment Misoperation. Use Just as the Kyle® Form 6 Recloser Control is a modular,
! of an incompatible or inappropriate settings updatable product, so is the ProViewTM application software.
file, scheme file, or custom software file in a relay or ProView provides an integrated environment for the configu-
recloser control can result in equipment misopera- ration and operation of your Form 6 control(s), as well as a
tion leading to equipment damage, severe personal complete programming system for developing power sys-
injury, or death. G140.0
tem applications. Cooper Power Systems offers develop-
ment services for customer applications. The advanced
nature of ProView application software and the Form 6 con-
CAUTION: System Misoperation. The
!process of downloading a new scheme file
trol allow custom configuration of control algorithms.
will cause this device to stop functioning as a pro- Programming courses for those interested in learning how
tective device for a period of approximately 8 sec- to go beyond configuration and operation of the Form 6
onds. Safe operating practices must be observed control are available. ProView is the most sophisticated
while downloading scheme files. Failure to comply operating system available for a microprocessor-based
can result in system misoperation. T299.0 recloser control.
CAUTION: Recloser Misoperation. Before IMPORTANT: The use of relays or recloser controls that
!downloading configuration files or settings use the ProView operating system may result in the cre-
to the equipment, verify that the files and settings ation of many combinations of setting files, scheme files,
are correct for the location and application. and custom software files. Many of these combinations
Downloading configuration files or settings can be downloaded into any relay or recloser control using
designed for a different location or application can the ProView operating system. The user must ensure that
result in severe personal injury and equipment the proper combination of software modules is created
damage. G133.0
and downloaded to the correct device for the application.
Requirements
ProView is an advanced operating system that utilizes the
power of your personal computer to maximize the useful-
ness of the Form 6 recloser control.
ProView specifications will give optimal performance if run
on a computer with the following specifications:
• Personal Computer with Intel® Pentium® II or higher
processor (or equivalent)
• 350 MHz or greater processor
• 256 MB of RAM or more
Absolute minimum requirements for using ProView are as
follows:
• Personal computer processor with the Microsoft®
Windows® 95 or later operating system, or Microsoft®
Windows NT® Workstation Version 4.0 or later operat-
ing system
• Monitor screen resolution of 800 x 600
• Minimum of 166 MHz processor speed
• Minimum 128 MB of RAM
• 80 MB of free hard-disk storage
3-1
Installing ProViewTM Software

Installing from a CD-ROM
ProView is installed like many other Microsoft® Windows®
applications. If you are not familiar with installing Microsoft®
Windows® applications, you may want to seek assistance
with this installation.
Insert the ProView CD into the drive. The Setup program
should start automatically.
Note: If the Setup program doesn’t start automatically, complete
the following steps:
1. Select RUN from the Start Menu.
2. Type d:/setup.exe (d=CD-ROM drive letter).
3. Click OK.
The initial setup screen should be displayed.
This could be displayed for

approximately 90 seconds.
Launching the Setup Program

The first part of the ProView installation is to locate a desti-
nation folder for the program itself. All components of the
program will reside in this folder.
The first screen you see is the Setup WELCOME screen.
Follow the instructions in the screen.
1. Click on NEXT to continue.
Read the Software License Agreement.

2. Click on YES to continue.
3-2
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
3. Select a destination folder for ProView.
The destination folder is located at the bottom of the
screen.
4. Select BROWSE to locate a different destination fold-
er location.
5. Click NEXT.
Note: Click BACK to return to the previous screen.
Installing ProView Components

This dialog box allows you to select the components that
will meet your application needs.
6. Select the applicable schemes.
Note: If TCC Editor is already installed on your PC with an
older version of ProView, it must be selected and
reinstalled.
7. Click NEXT.
Installation will begin.
A status window shows the progress of the installation.

Note: At this time, ProView will check the HTML Help file version
currently loaded.
If the version on the PC is older, the Help files will automati-
cally be updated.
If the version on the PC is newer, the following message
will appear: This computer already has a newer version of
HTML Help. Click OK.
Note: If Acrobat® Reader® software is not already installed on your
computer, a screen will appear asking if you want to install
it. Acrobat® Reader® software is used to view the electronic
version of the Form 6 Service Information manuals avail-
able in the Cooper/Proview40/Form6 folder.
3-3
Completing ProView Installation

After successful installation, a Create Shortcut screen
appears asking if you want to create shortcut(s) on your
Desktop.
8. Select the appropriate option.
9. Click NEXT.
A Setup Complete screen appears.

10. Select FINISH.
If you do not de-select the “Register Online” check-
box, you will be linked to the online ProView registra-
tion form.
Note: ProView 4.0 does not require a software authoriza-
tion key, but registration is still recommended so you
can easily access valuable modifications.
or
Click the “Register via Fax” checkbox to print the reg-
istration form. Complete the form and fax it to the
number shown at the bottom of the form.
or
De-select both fields and register later.
3-4
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
11. Remove the CD from the drive.
Continue on to the Login/Logout sections of this manual .
If you did not change the default destination folder, ProView
was installed in the PROGRAMS folder of your Microsoft®
Windows® START MENU: Program Files/Cooper/Proview40
It is not necessary to reboot your computer after ProView
installs.
Click this icon to access ProView without a scheme.
Click this icon to access the Form 6 control factory default scheme.
Click this icon to access the Form 6-TS control factory default scheme.
Click this icon to start the Form 6 4.0 Upgrade Wizard. The
Upgrade Wizard will only upgrade Form 6 Control ProView
Version 3.2.2. to ProView Version 4.0. The Upgrade Wizard
will not upgrade any other Form 6 ProView versions.
Click this icon to access TCC EditorTM II.
3-5
Login / Logout
When the Login/Logout screen appears:
1. Click on the arrow next to the NAME box.
2. Select the name of the appropriate access level.
VIEW: User can view metering and event data,
check settings, print and print preview,
and other read-only operations. No
changes are allowed at the VIEW level.
OPERATE: User has all the capabilities of the VIEW
level, plus the ability to download
schemes, settings, and firmware; delete
events, and complete other scheme-
dependent operations. No scheme set-
ting or structure modifications are
allowed at the OPERATE level.
MODIFY: User has all the capabilities of the
OPERATE level, plus the ability to
make scheme setting and structure
modifications.
Shortcut: Type the first letter of the access level you
wish to enter; the name will appear in the
box (i.e. “V” for View).
3. Select the PASSWORD box.
4. Type in the password. The default password is the
same as what you selected in the NAME box.
Note: Type the name in the PASSWORD box exactly the
way it appears. Capitalize the first letter of the word.
The password is disguised with asterisks (*).
5. Select LOGIN.
Note: If you choose not to login, select EXIT to exit
ProView.
You are now ready to open the appropriate scheme configu-
ration. Scheme activation is further explained in the
Loading Schemes section of this manual.
3-6
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Adding / Deleting Users and Changing Passwords

The ProView USER>EDIT drop-down menu opens the
USER EDITOR dialog box that is used to add or remove
users and change passwords.
Access Level Codes: View = 1
Operate = 2
Modify = 4
Note: Contact the Kyle Switchgear Support Group
®
(1-800-497-5953) if the password is misplaced.

MODIFY level users can access the User Editor screen
while in ProView or from within a scheme
OPERATE level users can only access the User Editor
screen while in ProView.
Follow this procedure to add a new user.
1. Type in a new Name and Password.
2. Assign the Access level.

Note: You can only add, edit, and delete users below your
own user level.
3. Click Add to add the new user.
You can only view other users at

or below your own user level.
3-7
Main ProViewTM Menus

After login, the main ProView software screen appears. It
contains five drop-down menus:
FILE, MANAGE, USER, VIEW, HELP
Note: Some menu options expand when a scheme is open.
Below is a brief description of each of these menus.
File Menu
Use the Main FILE drop down menu to OPEN a Form 6
scheme in a new window. You can open multiple schemes
at one time.
The FILE menu is where you EXIT the ProView session.
File Menu options when a

scheme is not loaded.
File Menu options when a

scheme is loaded.
The name of the scheme
appears at the top of the
menu bar.
The read only attribute
prevents users from
making changes to the
official released scheme.
After changes are made
the user must save the
scheme with a new name.
Manage Menu
The ProView MANAGE drop-down menu lets you open the
MANAGE CONNECTIONS dialog box, which is used for edit-
ing the characteristics of the PC communication connections.
Manage Menu options

when a scheme is
not loaded.
Manage Menu options when a scheme is loaded. The

name of the scheme appears at the top of the menu bar.
Data types is always grayed out. This menu is

only available to users with Factory access.
3-8
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
User Menu
The ProView USER drop-down menu lets you login and
logout of the ProView session.
This menu also accesses the User Editor dialog box that is
used to add/remove users and change passwords. Refer to
Adding / Deleting Users and Changing Passwords in
the Login / Logout section of this manual for additional
information.
View Menu
The ProView VIEW drop-down menu lets you display the
Toolbar, the Status bar, and the Connection Status.
The Toolbar consists of the icons below the main ProView
menu.
The Status Bar displays information at the bottom of the
ProView window when you highlight menu items with the
cursor.
The Connection Status (displayed next to the Toolbar)
View Menu options when shows the connection status between ProView and the
a scheme is not loaded. Form 6 recloser control.
Note: “No connection” will be displayed next to the Toolbar until a
ProView scheme is opened and connected to the control.
View Menu options when a scheme

is loaded. The name of the scheme
appears at the top of the menu bar.
Help Menu
The HELP drop-down menu accesses ProView Online Help
and Scheme Help. Scheme Help is only available when a
scheme is open.
Help Menu options when a

Help Menu options
scheme is loaded. The name
when a scheme is
of the scheme appears at the
not loaded.
top of the menu bar.
3-9
3-10
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Section 4: Form 6 Control Schemes

The Form 6 Recloser Control utilizes schemes of logical
WARNING: Equipment Misoperation. Use
! of an incompatible or inappropriate settings
operations that make up the protection functionality of the
control.
file, scheme file, or custom software file in a relay or
recloser control can result in equipment misopera- Schemes contain the programming tools of the Form 6 con-
tion leading to equipment damage, severe personal trol to provide comprehensive protection, control, and moni-
toring of reclosers within a power distribution application.
IMPORTANT: The use of relays or recloser controls that use the ProView operating system may result in the cre-
ation of many combinations of setting files, scheme files, and custom software files. Many of these combinations can
be downloaded into any relay or recloser control using the ProView operating system. The user must ensure that the
proper combination of software modules is created and downloaded to the correct device for the application.
Loading Schemes
CAUTION: Recloser Misoperation. Before The FILE menu dropdown lists the Form 6 control schemes
! downloading configuration files or settings to at the bottom. Schemes can be loaded by selecting one
the equipment, verify that the files and settings are from the list or by using the OPEN command at the top of
correct for the location and application. the FILE menu.
Downloading configuration files or settings
designed for a different location or application can CAUTION: System Misoperation. The process
result in severe personal injury and equipment ! of downloading a new scheme file will cause this
damage. G133.0
device to stop functioning as a protective device for a
period of approximately 8 seconds. Safe operating
practices must be observed while downloading
scheme files. Failure to comply can result in system
misoperation. T299.0
Multiple schemes can be open at one time. Switch between

schemes by selecting different schemes listed in the Form6
folder.
Follow these steps to open a scheme from the Form6 folder:
1. Select OPEN from the ProView Main Menu.
2. Select the computer drive where ProView resides.
3. Open the Form6 folder.
4. Select the appropriate scheme.
5. Click on OPEN.
The scheme will load.
Note: The process of loading takes approximately 30 to 45 sec-
onds. The lower left corner of the screen will show the num-
ber of elements loading as the scheme loads.
All Form 6 schemes must reside in the Proview40/Form6
folder.
IMPORTANT: The factory default scheme file is read

only. If the factory default scheme is modified, ProView
4.0 will require you to save the scheme with a new
name.
4-1
Communicating with the Form 6 Recloser Control

Connecting to the Form 6 Control CAUTION: Equipment misoperation. Do not
! connect this control to an energized recloser
CAUTION: Recloser misoperation. The control until all control settings have been properly pro-
! must be removed from service prior to perform- grammed and verified. Refer to the programming infor-
mation for this control. Failure to comply can result in
ing any maintenance or testing or programming
changes. Failure to comply can result in misoperation control and recloser misoperation, equipment damage,
(unintentional operation) of the recloser. T216.2
and personal injury. G110.3
Your PC, with ProView up and running, must be connected

to the Form 6 Recloser Control to compare or change set-
tings. ProView connects to the control directly via an RS-
232 9-pin serial cable or through a modem:
1. Connect the 9-pin RS-232 cable between the PC and
the RS-232 communication port.
2. Click on CONNECT in the center of the ProView
menu bar.
Communications
Status Button (not
communicating)
Communications Information
The Select Connection dialog box will appear.
3. Select the appropriate connection and click OK.
Note: Verify that no additional software requires the same
communication serial Com port as the designated
ProView software port.
Note: Additional connections can be added to this list.
Refer to Configuring ProView Connection Profiles
section in this manual for additional information.
4. You will be prompted to enter your user password.

The default password for the View and Operate level
users is View.
The default password for the Modify user is Modify.
After you enter your password, ProView will attempt to
locate a Form 6 control via the selected port.
Note: Once you are connected to the control, you can change
your password through the Manage>Device>Change pass-
word dialog box.
Note: If you attempt to connect via the wrong port, you can abort
The yellow question mark (?) symbol can occur for the the connection attempt by clicking on CONNECT anytime it
following reasons: incompatible version of ProView, appears with the yellow question mark (?) symbol. Clicking
incorrect communication port, or no cable connected. on CONNECT after communication has been established
will disconnect the PC from the control.
4-2
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
After successfully connecting to the control, the Comparing
Scheme to Connected Device box will appear. The progress
bar indicates that ProView is comparing the contents of the
connected Form 6 control to the Form 6 control scheme
currently loaded on the PC.
Note: This process depends on your computer’s speed and RAM
and can take several minutes. Refer to Using ProView
Software Introduction section for minimum PC hardware
requirements.
5. After the comparing process is complete, the
Compare dialog box appears. This summarizes the
comparison of the firmware, scheme, and clock set-
tings between the ProView scheme file and the Form
6 Control.
Disconnecting from the Control

Click on the Communications Status Button to disconnect
from the Form 6 recloser control.
Communications Status Button
4-3
Adding ProView Connection Profiles

Additional connections can be added to the Manage
Connections list. Add a new connection as follows:
1. Open the Manage Connections dialog box.
Note: A connection to the control is not necessary when
setting up the manage connections dialog.
2. Click on ADD. The Add New Connection box appears.
3. Select the connection type.

A new Description labeled “(none)” will be added to the
Manage Connections dialog box list.
4. Click on “(none)” to select it and then click on EDIT.

• If you are adding a Serial (Direct/Modem) connec-
tion the Communications Connection Direct dialog
box will appear.
A. Select the communication port that the com-
puter will use to connect to the control.
B. Select the baud rate.
The option to enter a phone number is available. If a phone

number is entered, it is automatically dialed when that
connection is selected. Upon connecting, an ASCII terminal
emulator window will open providing the opportunity to
enter an ASCII command string to an intermediate device,
such as a communications port switcher. When done
entering any required ASCII commands needed to finish
connection to the control, close the terminal emulator.
4-4
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
• If you are adding an (Ethernet) TCP/IP Socket
connection the Communications Connection
Socket dialog box will appear: Enter the IP
address allocated to the Form 6 control in the
Name field.
Note: Refer to next page for additional Ethernet
Configuration information.
5. Click on the NAME tab in the Communications

Connection dialog box.
6. If desired, change the connection name from
“(none)”.
7. Click on OK to return to the Manage Connections
Dialog Box.
8. Click on DONE.
The connection has been successfully added.
4-5
Ethernet Configuration
Device settings can only be changed once a connection is
made to the Form 6 control via the RS-232 port. Connect to
the front panel for initial network setup.
Complete the fields in the Device Settings dialog box:
Modem initialization string – If the control is being connect-
ed through a modem and it is necessary to setup the
modem upon power up, this field allows you to setup the
modem upon power up.
TCP/IP Configuration
Network name: This setting is user-defined.
Domain name: This setting is user-defined.
IP Address: A static IP address must be allocated to func-
tion. This address is provided by the user IT Department.
Subnet Mask: A static IP address must be allocated to func-
tion. This address is provided by the user IT Department.
SDU (Session Data Unit) size: This value must remain set
to 8192.
Buffer segment size: This value must remain set at 1050.
Note: The above two variables might change in the future as UCA
develops.
ProView port: This value can be any valid IP port setting,
but must match ProView and the Form 6 control. 1024 is
the default setting and can be changed as necessary to
match individual network settings. Contact your IT depart-
ment for further consultation.
Default gateway: If the device you are connecting to is on a
different network segment (defined by the subnet mask) a
default gateway must be entered in this field.
Primary Ethernet interface: This specifies which of the two
ports on the Ethernet card is the primary communications
port. Value ‘1’ denotes the port nearest to the edge of the
control and ‘2’ denotes the port closest to the RS232 port.
Note: The Ethernet Interface will not automatically change
between primary and secondary ports in the event of net-
work failure.
Physical Address Configuration
Factory address: This is the MAC (media access controller)
address or physical address of the card. This address is
unique to this piece of hardware and cannot be changed by
the user.
Alternate address: This field must be empty for normal
operation. When retrofitting new equipment into an existing
network entering the old factory MAC address in this field is
required for the network to function properly.
Note: All settings in this dialog box are maintained within the
Form 6 control when downloading firmware or scheme files.
This allows for Ethernet-based connections to be preserved
when downloading files from remote locations.
4-6
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Comparing PC Schemes and Settings to the Form 6 Recloser Control

After the scheme is loaded into the computer, connection to
IMPORTANT: The factory default scheme file is the control via a communications port must be accom-
read only. If the factory default scheme is modified, plished before settings or event data can be sent to or from
ProView 4.0 will require you to save the scheme the control, or before the View Online mode can be activat-
with a new name. ed. ProView acts differently once it is "Connected" and has
more features enabled.
Note: If a function you want to use is "grayed out" in a menu or
dialog box, it may be because you have not successfully
connected to a control.
Once the connection is made, the Connection to Device

Message Box will be displayed.
After connection is successfully established, the COMPARI-

SON STATUS button on the toolbar will appear in one of
several possible modes.
Whenever the COMPARISON STATUS button is clicked on,
the comparison dialog box will appear.
Appearance of Comparison Status button when the control

contains a different scheme (different Workbenches).
Appearance of Comparison Status button when the

control contains different settings.
Appearance of Comparison Status button when settings

and scheme (Workbenches) are identical between
control and PC (if no changes since download).
Appearance of Comparison Status button when settings,

scheme, and variables are identical between control and PC.
4-7
This dialog box allows you to see what is different between

the PC and the control, and either upload (receive) informa-
tion from the control or download (send) information to the
control. The structure in the PC must match the control if
you are going Online.
Where information is identical between the PC and the con-

trol, the action button(s) will be disabled (grayed out). If set-
tings information differs, the action button will be enabled.
Clicking on DETAILS will bring up a dialog box that enables

you to compare the value of the control settings to the PC
settings. Discrepancies can then be corrected by uploading
or downloading individual settings, selected settings, or all
settings.
This dialog box only shows the values of the settings that
are different between the control and the PC. The comma-
delimited values represent the setting for each setting
group.
To change the setting on the control to a new value you

have entered on your PC, simply select the line(s) of inter-
est and click “Download selected settings to device” to send
the revised setting(s) to the control.
IMPORTANT: Downloading settings to the control will erase

any unsaved oscillography records. Ensure that all oscil-
lography records are saved before downloading schemes
or settings.
If the control settings are correct, you should upload them

from the control to ensure that your PC has the correct
information. Do this by first clicking on SELECT ALL, and
then clicking on UPLOAD SELECTED SETTINGS FROM
DEVICE.
Progress Bar indicates downloading status.
After you correct any mismatches, the COMPARISON STA-

TUS button should revert to the "Equal" mode.
Appearance of Comparison Status button in “Equal” mode.
4-8
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Downloading the Scheme Structure, Idea Workbench, and Settings

WARNING: Equipment Misoperation. Use CAUTION: Recloser Misoperation. Before
! of an incompatible or inappropriate settings ! downloading configuration files or settings to the
file, scheme file, or custom software file in a relay or equipment, verify that the files and settings are correct
recloser control can result in equipment misopera- for the location and application. Downloading configu-
tion leading to equipment damage, severe personal ration files or settings designed for a different location
injury, or death. G140.0 or application can result in severe personal injury and
equipment damage. G133.0
IMPORTANT: The use of relays or recloser controls

that use the ProView operating system may result in
the creation of many combinations of setting files, CAUTION: System Misoperation. The process
scheme files, and custom software files. Many of ! of downloading a new scheme file will cause this
these combinations can be downloaded into any device to stop functioning as a protective device for a
relay or recloser control using the ProView operat- period of approximately 8 seconds. Safe operating
ing system. The user must ensure that the proper practices must be observed while downloading
combination of software modules is created and scheme files. Failure to comply can result in system
downloaded to the correct device for the application. misoperation. T299.0
In addition to uploading and downloading settings, ProView

also allows the entire protection scheme to be downloaded
from the PC to the Form 6 control. This download is accom-
plished by clicking on Structure Download to device in the
Compare dialog box. This selection is only enabled if there
are differences in the structure (Workbenches) of the
scheme on the control as compared to the PC scheme.
You can also upload the Idea Workbench from the control to
the PC by clicking on Idea Workbench Upload from device.
IMPORTANT: The factory default scheme file is read only.

If the factory default scheme is modified, ProView 4.0 will
require you to save the scheme with a new name.
Structure "Download" button

(Download scheme to control)
If the control and PC are not equal, proceed as follows:

Workbench "Upload" button 1. Upload Idea Workbenches.
(Upload Workbenches to PC)
2. If you are still not equal, Upload the Settings.
3. If you are still not equal, Download the Structure.
IMPORTANT: Downloading structure to the control will

erase any unsaved oscillography records. Ensure that all
oscillography records are saved before downloading
schemes or settings.
Progress Bar indicates uploading

and downloading status.
4-9
Settings
Just as in Form 6 Recloser Control front panel program-
ming, the SETTINGS menu allows viewing and modification
of function settings. There are additional functions in
ProView that are not available in the LCD displays from the
front panel. The illustration at the left shows the functions
available in ProView.
Some of the front panel settings are combined within the
ProView menu. For example, Reclose Intervals and Reset
Time from the front panel LCDs are included in the
Reclosing dialog box.
Each function of the SETTINGS menu and detailed instruc-
tion on accessibility and programming are described in this
section.
4-10
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Simplified Setup
The Simplified Setup dialog box provides one summarized
screen to view and modify commonly used settings for the
current protection profile.
Changes made to this screen will also be reflected in the
appropriate drop-down menu for the same setting.
4-11
Operations Parameters
The Operations Parameters menu provides access to dia-

log boxes that let you view and modify overcurrent protec-
tion settings for all protection profiles and program the Form
6 control with specific curve characteristics for TCC1 and
TCC2 time-current curves and their associated settings.
Overcurrent Protection Profiles
The Form 6 recloser control provides four Overcurrent

Protection profiles:
• Normal Profile
• Alternate Profile #1
Each overcurrent protection profile has its own settings.
4-12
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Changing Overcurrent Protection Profile

Changes to overcurrent protection profiles are made in the
SETTINGS GROUP SELECTION box.
IMPORTANT: Program all protection profiles for appropri-

ate system application. Unused alternate profiles
(Alternate Profile #1, Alternate Profile #2, Alternate
Profile #3) should be programmed with the same settings
as one of the applicable profiles. The default settings on
unused alternate profiles can cause unnecessary out-
ages if they are left at the default levels.
There are two methods available to select or change the

overcurrent protection profile within the SETTINGS menu.
The first way is to select SETTINGS GROUP SELECTOR.
Upon activation, the SETTINGS GROUP SELECTION dia-
log box appears.
The second way is to select CHANGE SETTING GROUP
(from one of several Settings menus) to activate the SET-
TINGS GROUP SELECTION box.
When you select Active Profile or Edit Profile, all four over-
current protection profiles are listed. Select the profile for
your application.
Active Profile is the protection profile that is currently run-
ning in the Form 6 recloser control. Use it when you are
connected to the Form 6 control and alternate profile
changes are required.
Edit Profile is the protection profile selected for modifi-
cation.
Note: The selected profile(s) appears in the EDIT PROFILE box
once the command is accepted.
Select CHANGE SETTING GROUP to activate
the SETTING GROUP SELECTION box. After making changes, always click
OK before clicking CHANGE
SETTING GROUP. Otherwise, the
changes will not be registered.
4-13
Changing Overcurrent Protection Parameters

The Overcurrent Protection dialog box lets you program the
control with the settings associated with the phase, ground,
and negative sequence overcurrent elements that are com-
mon to both TCC1 and TCC2.
Note: The Form 6 recloser control is a three-phase device; all
three phases trip on the settings programmed.
Minimum Trip
Minimum Trip is the threshold setting for overcurrent protec-
tion. Once the threshold is exceeded, the control begins
timing on the programmable time-current curve.
CAUTION: Equipment Damage. Verify the maximum
changing minimum trip values. Refer to Reference
to the recloser under load conditions. T310.0
CAUTION: Equipment Misoperation. Check mini-

mum trip values prior to changing an alternate profile.
Failure to do so may cause misoperation of the control
under load conditions. T280.0
The Minimum Trip values and ranges are:

Phase and Negative Sequence
Units: Amps
Range: 20 to 3200 A (2000:1 CT Ratio)
IMPORTANT: Always verify the minimum trip values 10 to 1600 A (1000:1 CT Ratio)
5 to 800 A (500:1 CT Ratio)
Accuracy: ±5% and ±1mA secondary for settings greater
than 10mA secondary
Front Panel LCD display designation: TCCPMinTrip
TCCQMinTrip
4-14
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Ground
Units: Amps
Range: 10 to 1600 A (2000:1 CT Ratio)
5 to 800 A (1000:1 CT Ratio)
2 to 400 A (500:1 CT Ratio)
Accuracy: ±5%
Front Panel LCD display designation: TCCGMinTrip
Block Trip
Block Trip disables the Phase, Ground, or Negative
Sequence tripping functions.
Note: Ground tripping can be blocked from the front operator
panel function key GND TRIP BLOCKED. When the
Ground Trip Blocked feature is enabled, the Sensitive Earth
Fault feature is disabled.
Note: Block settings can also be programmed through the Idea
WorkbenchTM.
Overcurrent Alarm and Alarm Time Delay
Overcurrent alarms are active when the user-programmed
alarm threshold and time delay settings have been reached.
Overcurrent alarms automatically reset (without any intention-
al time delay) when the condition is below the setting point.
If the user wants an Overcurrent Alarm to be recorded in
the Event Recorder or perform any additional functions, the
alarm must be configured via the Hardware Workbench or
the Communications Workbench.
The alarm will only be recorded as an event-type if the user
configures it as a user-defined SOE event.
Note: Refer to Workbench Outputs Toolbox in the Workbench
section and Sequence of Events in the Display section of
this manual for additional event recorder information.
The values and ranges of Overcurrent Alarm and Alarm
Time Delay are:
Overcurrent Alarm for Phase and Negative Sequence
Units: Amps
Range: 5 to 3200 A
Accuracy: ±5%
Overcurrent Alarm for Ground
Units: Amps
Range: 2 to 1600 A
Accuracy: ±5%
Alarm Time Delay
Units: seconds
Range: 0 to 3600 seconds
Accuracy: ±5% and ±5 ms
4-15
Changing TCC1, TCC2 Parameters

The TCC1 and TCC2 dialog boxes allow you to program
the control with the settings associated with the specific
curve characteristics for the TCC1 and TCC2 curve shapes.
All TCCs can be modified for Phase, Ground, or Negative
Sequence. These dialog boxes provide access to the stan-
dard time-current curve shapes, plus the five custom User
curves and modifiers.
User Curves are user-defined, custom curves created in

TCC Editor II for the Form 6 recloser control. The User
Curves dialog box enables user curve data to be read from
the respective setting files (User1 settings.txt through User5
settings.txt). These files can be viewed with any text editor.
When any section is clicked There must be a TCC loaded

The curve(s) last accessed in TCC Editor will load. on, the parameter descriptions (in each profile) for the curve
and their allowable setting parameter you want to import
ranges are displayed at the prior to Importing Curve
bottom of the dialog box. Parameters from TCC Editor.
For instance, if you want to
import a Phase Operation
IMPORTANT: When import- Number 1 custom user curve,
ing curve parameters from a Phase 1 curve must be
TCC Editor, the curve(s) last loaded in Normal, Alternate 1,
accessed in TCC Editor will Alternate 2, and Alternate 3
load. profiles.
Note: An error message appears if the setting entered is outside

the value limits of the setting.
4-16
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Curve Type
The Curve Type defines the shape of the TCC. There are
fifty unique curves available in the Form 6 recloser control.
The available curve types are:
• Kyle Curves 101 through 202
• Constant (definite time) Curves
• ANSI Inverse, Very Inverse, Extremely Inverse; IEC
Inverse, Very Inverse, Extremely Inverse; and five
custom curves (User 1 through 5).
Note: All curves, including User curves, can be viewed and modi-
fied using the TCC Editor II.
Below are the available curve types and their associated
index identification within the recloser scheme settings file.
F6 Curve F3 Cross F6 Curve F3 Cross
Name Reference Index Name Reference Index
Kyle 101 A 0 Kyle 151 18 31
Kyle 102 1 1 Kyle 152 7 32
Kyle 103 17 2 Kyle 161 T 33
Kyle 104 N 3 Kyle 162 K-Phase 34
Kyle 105 R 4 Kyle 163 F 35
Kyle 106 4 5 Kyle 164 J 36
Kyle 107 L 6 Kyle 165 K-Ground 37
Kyle 111 8*, 8+ 7 IEC Inv (200) n/a 38
Kyle 112 15 8 IEC VI (201) n/a 39
Kyle 113 8 9 IEC EI (202) n/a 40
Kyle 114 5 10 Constant n/a 41
Kyle 115 P 11 ANSI Inv n/a 42
Kyle 116 D 12 ANSI VI n/a 43
Kyle 117 B 13 ANSI EI n/a 44
Kyle 118 M 14 USER1 n/a 45
Kyle 119 14 15 USER2 n/a 46
Kyle 120 Y 16 USER3 n/a 47
Kyle 121 G 17 USER4 n/a 48
Kyle 122 H 18 USER5 n/a 49
Kyle 131 9 19
Time Multiplier
Kyle 132 E 20
This setting defines the Time Multiplier and the TCC
Kyle 133 C 21
Multiplier Enable to modify the position of the original TCC
Kyle 134 Z 22 in time-current space. If the TCC Multiplier is Enabled, the
Kyle 135 2 23 trip time of a given TCC at a measured current is shifted in
Kyle 136 6 24
time by the specified multiple.
Kyle 137 V 25 For example, if a curve has an operate time of 40 ms and a
multiplier of 2, the "modified" operate time would be 80 ms.
Kyle 138 W 26
40 ms x 2 = 80 ms
Kyle 139 16 27
Kyle 140 3 28 Similarly, if the same curve has an operate time of 5 sec-
onds, the "modified" operate time would be 10 seconds.
Kyle 141 11 29
5 seconds x 2 = 10 seconds
Kyle 142 13 30
4-17
Time Adder
The adder settings define a Time Adder and a TCC Add
Enable to modify the position of the original TCC in time-
current space. If the Time Adder is enabled, the trip time of
a given TCC at a measured current is shifted in time by the
specified additional time. In contrast to the time multiplier,
the Time Adder adds a constant time to the curve, regard-
less of the unmodified curve.
seconds.
Minimum Response Time
The Minimum Response Time (MRT) settings define a
Minimum Response Time and a TCC MRTA Enable to mod-
ify the shape of the original TCC in time-current space. If
the MRT is Enabled, the minimum trip time of a given TCC
is defined to be no less than the value of MRT.
High Current Trip
High Current Trip (HCT) settings define a HCT, a HCT Time
Delay, and a HCT Enable to modify the shape of the origi-
nal TCC in time-current space. If HCT is Enabled, the
shape of the TCC at currents beyond the HCT setting will
be definite time, as defined by the HCT Time Delay.
Reset Coefficient
The Reset Coefficient settings define the rate at which the
control resets the TCC if a non-instantaneous reset is speci-
fied. The reset coefficient is the equivalent of the mechani-
cal reset of induction disk controls. The TCC reset time is
determined by the following equation:
• TCC Reset Time = (TM*RCC)/(M2-1) where TM
equals the TCC Time Multiplier setting from the TCC
Modifiers, RCC is the reset coefficient setting, and M
is the ratio of the applied current to the minimum trip
setting of the TCC type.
Note: When Disk Reset is used, the reclose interval must be long
enough to allow the disk to fully reset to avoid faster than
expected tripping times encountered on successive shots.
Fast Trip Block
Fast Trip Block appears only in the TCC1 operation para-
meters dialog box. The function of Fast Trip Block is to elim-
inate the fast TCC1 tripping curve.
TCC EditorTM
TCC EditorTM is activated from the TCC1 and TCC2 dialog
boxes, enabling you to read or write to the TCC Editor
linked to the associated curve shape modifier. See Using
TCC EditorTM II section of this chapter.
Note: Modifications to the operation parameters can be pre-
defined in and viewed by the TCC Editor and imported
using the controls in the TCC1 and TCC2 dialog boxes.
4-18
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Using TCC EditorTM II

The TCC Editor II is used to modify time-current curves pro-
grammed into the Form 6 recloser control. By using modi-
fiers, you can design a new TCC to better coordinate the
reclosers on your distribution system.
The TCC Editor II can also be used to create custom
curves. The Custom Curve Editor gives you complete con-
trol over the shape of the TCC.
The TCC Editor II is accessible from the Operations
Parameter TCC1 or TCC2 dialog boxes. The illustration at
the left is the initial TCC Editor screen that appears when
TCC Editor II is selected.
The toolbar of the TCC Editor contains its own FILE, EDIT,
SPECIAL, VIEW, and WINDOW menus.
FILE: Lets you open, close, print, and create TCCs.
The menu is also used to exit the program.
EDIT: Lets you insert, copy, paste and modify
TCCs.
Note: The INSERT function is used to assign a
TCC to a specific phase, ground, or nega-
tive sequence TCC trip operation.
SPECIAL: Lets you find information about the TCCs,
configure the TCC Editor II program, invoke
the Custom Curve Editor, and change the
aspect ratio of graphs.
VIEW: Lets you control the TCC Editor toolbar and
status bar.
WINDOW: Helps you control the TCC Editor document
viewing windows.
Cascade: Aligns the curve viewing windows from
top-to-bottom and left-to-right.
Tile: Arranges the curve windows so that
they are all visible within the TCC Editor
window.
Arrange: Places icons of all the curve windows at
the bottom of the screen.
The TCC Editor II HELP menu provides detailed information
on the individual commands within the main toolbar.
4-19
Form 6 Recloser Control Tree View

The Form 6 recloser control Tree View feature of the TCC
Editor allows you to view the TCCs as well as see the orga-
nization of the groups of TCCs in a "tree" arrangement. The
Tree appears on the left side of the TCC Editor II screen.
Access the Form 6 control Tree as follows:
1. Select CURVE1.
2. To expand the curve, click on the plus sign (+) next to
"Curve1".
To expand the four protection profiles that appear, click on
the plus sign of each profile. A minus sign (–) will replace
the plus sign (+).
Each curve has its Phase, Ground, and Negative Sequence
parameters displayed for Normal and Alternate 1, 2, and 3
protection profiles.
Each profile holds 9 TCCs:
• Phase TCC1 and Phase TCC2 and Cold Load Pickup
• Ground TCC1, Ground TCC2 and Cold Load Pickup
• Negative Sequence (Q) 1, 2, and Cold Load Pickup
Note: Phase 1 represents TCC1 for Phase (fast curve).
Phase 2 represents TCC2 for Phase (slow curve).
Ground 1 represents TCC1 for Ground.
Ground 2 represents TCC2 for Ground.
The right-hand side of the screen plots the TCCs on a log-
log graph.
Copying Profiles
Entire profiles can be copied from one to another:
1. Click on the profile you want to copy.
2. Select COPY from the EDIT drop-down menu.
3. Click on the profile you want to copy to.
4. Select PASTE from the EDIT drop down menu.
Tree Icons
These icons define TCC status:
white icon
yellow icon
green icon
yellow icon
blue icon
red icon
4-20
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Insert TCCs in TCC EditorTM II

There are two ways to insert TCCs. The first way is through
the EDIT menu of TCC Editor II.
1. Select EDIT menu.
2. Select INSERT TCC.
The second way is through the Form 6 Recloser Control

Tree View section of the TCC Editor II screen. From the
appropriate protection profile group, complete the following
steps:
1. Left-click to select the applicable TCC node.
2. Right-click on the node.
3. Select and left-click on INSERT.
The INSERT TCC dialog box appears from the EDIT menu
of the Form 6 tree.
Note: If you have selected a TCC node that does not have a TCC
assigned to it, the Name box in the Library Source section
will show three question marks (???) when the Insert TCC
dialog box appears.
4. Click CHANGE to access the applicable Time-Current
Curve library.
The program allows you to select TCCs from the Kyle

library of curves or the ANSI and IEC standard curves.
5. Select the desired curve.
6. Click OK.
The INSERT TCC dialog box appears with the name of the
TCC in the Library Source section of the box.
At this point, you can elect to modify or use the selected
TCC with its current parameters.
4-21
TCC Selection
There are two ways to select an individual Form 6 control
TCC.
One way is to expand the tree nodes and click on a TCC
icon as shown at the left.
• Phase 1 represents TCC1 for Phase (fast curve).
• Phase 2 represents TCC2 for Phase (slow curve).
• Ground 1 represents TCC1 for Ground.
• Ground 2 represents TCC2 for Ground.
The second way is to click on the desired TCC plotted on

the graph. The TCC will turn red to show it is active.
PHASE 1 TCC (Kyle 105)

is selected from the graph.
The label in the Curve
Tree is also highlighted.
TCC Group Selection

To select the entire profile group, select the profile name
within the TCC tree.
Or, you can select the entire Form 6 control TCC file by
clicking the root node as shown at left.
Highlight Profile Group Highlight the root node to

name to Select all TCCs in select all TCCs within all
the group. Profile groups of that curve
root.
4-22
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Modifying Curves
Once a TCC is assigned to a protection profile element
(Phase, Ground, Negative Sequence, Cold Load Pickup),
you will be able to modify that TCC.
To select a TCC for modification proceed as follows:
1. Left-click on the applicable TCC node.
3. Select and left-click on MODIFY.
Note: The selected curve turns red on the graph.
Shortcut: You can modify a selected curve from the TCC Editor
EDIT menu.
The MODIFY dialog box is used to apply modifiers to TCCs

picked from a library. The MODIFY and INSERT TCC dialog
boxes are identical. The CHANGE button is used to select a
curve from the library of curves. You can apply modifiers to
the selected curve.
Note: The MODIFY feature lets you see the results of the modifi-
cations before committing them to memory.
The table below describes how a curve can be modified.
Form 6 TCC Modifier Limits

Multiplier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.0
Adder (sec) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.2
Minimum Response This is the order of operation to modify a TCC:
Time (sec) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1. Multiply
HCT Current Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 2. Add
HCT Time Value (sec) . . . . . . . . . . 0.150 3. Set the time value to the MRT time if the Minimum
Response Time (MRT) is enabled and if the current
TCC time value is below the MRT.
4. Set the time value to the HCT time value if High
Current Trip (HCT) is enabled, and if the current ratio
(I/Imt) for this point equals or is above the HCT ratio,
and if the current TCC time value is above the HCT
time value.
4-23
Time-Current Curve Properties

The Curve Properties dialog box displays general properties
about the TCC. The Properties box is divided into three cat-
egories, each in its own tabbed dialog box.
• General
• Modifiers
The General curve properties page of the dialog box has

the following information:
• Displays Frequency Class of the curve
• Displays if the curve is a Maximum Response Time
curve
• Indicates if the curve is from the Kyle Library of
curves
• Indicates if the curve has been modified
The Modifiers page of the dialog box displays the following

information:
• The library and user name of the curve
• The state and value of the curve multiplier and adder
• The state and value of the minimum response time
• The state and value of the high current trip (HCT) cur-
rent ratio and time value
Note: Curve properties and modifiers can be viewed (not

changed) from the SPECIAL/PROPERTIES TCC Editor II
menu.
4-24
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
TCC Report
The TCC Report displays all the modifications made to the
TCCs in each protection profile group. The report provides
the following information:
• The exact location of the root curve grouping (i.e.
Curve1)
• The date the report was generated
• How the report was generated
To access the TCC Report, proceed as follows:

1. Left-click on the applicable TCC node.
3. Select and left-click on REPORT.
TCC EditorTM II Configuration Dialog Box

The Configuration dialog box is used to configure the TCC
Editor II program.
CONTROL TYPE: Picks the default graph type for TCC
creation.
FREQUENCY: Selects the default frequency to which
the TCCs are generated.
GRAPH LIMITS
AND PRINTING: Used to rotate the graph for use with
older Microsoft® Windows® 95 print
drivers. The default setting is OFF.
Note: New operating systems should not
use this box.
4-25
To edit an existing time-current curve (TCC), proceed as

follows:
1. Select the CUSTOM CURVE EDITOR from the SPE-
CIAL menu.
2. Select EDIT.
The Custom Curve Editor contains libraries of different

TCCs.
• Custom Curves
• Kyle library of curves per IEC standard
• Kyle library of curves per ANSI standard
The IEC and ANSI standard curves are defined as Inverse,
Very Inverse, and Extremely Inverse.
3. Select and click on the library that contains the
desired curve to be modified.
4. Click on VIEW.
A list of the TCCs in the selected library appears.

5. Select the applicable TCC and click OK.
6. The Custom Curve Editor screen now contains all the
values of the selected TCC.
7. Change the values to fit your application.
8. Click on SAVE.
Note: Verify where you are saving the curve. The curve must
be saved to the Cooper/ProView40/Form6 folder.
IMPORTANT: When importing curve parameters from

TCC Editor, the curve(s) last accessed in TCC Editor
will load.
4-26
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Kyle Aspect Ratio

The Kyle Aspect Ratio is used to view the TCC graph in a
Kyle standard 1:1 ratio or a full window view.
Kyle Aspect Ratio active
Kyle Aspect Ratio inactive

(Full window view)
4-27
Reclose
The Reclose menu provides access to dialog boxes that let

you program the following:
• Timing and Control
– Reclose Open Intervals
– Reset Intervals
– Sequence Coordination
– Target Control
• Reclose Retry Settings
Modify the Reclose settings of a specific protection profile

group by selecting CHANGE SETTING GROUP to activate
the SETTINGS GROUP SELECTION box.
Select CHANGE SETTING GROUP

to activate the SETTING GROUP
SELECTION box.
After making changes, always click
OK before clicking CHANGE
SETTING GROUP. Otherwise, the
change will not be registered.
RESET TIME is the

intentional time delay
introduced by the control
after a successful reclose,
before the control resets the
sequence position counter.
When RESET TARGETS is

enabled, targets reset
automatically after
expiration of Reset Targets
Time Delay.
RESET TARGETS Time Delay
When SEQUENCE COORDINATION is enabled, the Form 6 recloser control sequences

for a fault up to the maximum operations programmed on sequence coordination.
4-28
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Open Intervals
Reclose (Open) interval settings define the time the recloser
is open following a trip operation, prior to issuing a reclose
Open Interval settings and allowable setting limits are listed
below.
Phase/Negative Sequence Reclose (Open) Interval Time
Units: Seconds
Range: 1st Open Interval – 0.3 to 1000
2nd Open Interval – 1.8 to 1000
3rd Open Interval – 1.8 to 1000
Front Panel LCD display designation:
PQOpenInt#1, PQOpenInt#2, PQOpenInt#3
Ground Reclose (Open) Interval Time
Units: Seconds
Range: 1st Open Interval – 0.3 to 1000
2nd Open Interval – 1.8 to 1000
3rd Open Interval – 1.8 to 1000
GndOpenInt#1, GndOpenInt#2, GndOpenInt#3
Reset Time
Reset Time is the intentional time delay introduced by the
control after a successful reclose, before the control resets
the sequence position counter to zero. Reset after success-
ful reclose occurs when the recloser is closed and no over-
current is detected.
Reset Time
Units: Seconds
Range: 3 to 1800
Front Panel LCD display designation: ResetTime
Reset Targets
If RESET TARGETS box is checked, the front panel LED
targets reset automatically after expiration of Reset Targets
Time Delay.
Reset Targets Time
Units: Seconds
Range: 2 to 3600
Sequence Coordination
If ALLOW SEQUENCE COORDINATION BOX is checked,
the Form 6 recloser control sequences for a fault up to the
maximum operations programmed on sequence coordination.
Sequence Coordination Operations
Note: For an operating sequence of 2 fast and 2 Units: none
delayed operations, the Sequence Range: 1 to 3
Coordination Operations should be set to 2. No LCD display designation
4-29
Reclose Retry Interval

The Reclose Retry interval setting defines the interval delay
between Reclose Retry attempts.
Reclose Retry Interval
Units: Seconds
Range: 10 to 180
No LCD display designation
Reclose Retry Attempts

The Reclose Retry setting controls the number of times that
a Reclose Retry is attempted. If the device fails to close
after attempting a Reclose Retry operation for the total
number of Reclose Retry attempts, the control will go to
lockout.
Range: 1 to 10
Reclose Retry Enable

If the Allow Reclose Retry box is checked, the Form 6 con-
trol will attempt a Reclose Retry operation for unsuccessful
recloses, up to the maximum programmed number of
Reclose Retry attempts.
Range: Enabled or Disabled
4-30
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Operations Sequence
The Operation Sequence lets you program these settings:
• Number of Trip Operations-to-Lockout
• Sequence of Overcurrent Trip Operations for
Phase/Negative Sequence, and Ground

the SETTING GROUP SELECTION box.
After making changes, always click OK before
clicking CHANGE SETTING GROUP.
Otherwise, the change will not be registered.
Define the order in which phase and negative sequence Select the number
curves designated as TCC1 and TCC2 will trip. of trip operations in
a sequence.
Operations-to-Lockout
operations in a sequence before the control opens and
locks out. The count includes phase, ground, and negative
trips as well as sequence coordination operations.
Operation Sequence
(Phase/Negative Sequence and Ground)
Operations Sequence settings for Phase/Negative
Sequence define the order in which phase and negative
sequence curves designated as TCC1 and TCC2 will trip.
Operations Sequence settings for Ground define the order
in which Ground curves designated as TCC1 and TCC2 will
trip.
4-31
Hot Line Tag

Hot Line Tag prevents all closing attempts and shifts protec-
tion to one trip-to-lockout on the composite curve of the Hot
Line Tag definite time and the TCC1 curve (whichever is
faster).
Note: When Hot Line Tag and CLPU are both active the Form 6
control reverts back to the original minimum pick-up values
(i.e. disables CLPU settings).
Select CHANGE SETTING GROUP to activate the SETTING GROUP SELECTION box.
After making changes, always click OK before clicking CHANGE SETTING GROUP.
Time Delay (Phase, Ground, and Negative Sequence)

When Hot Line Tag is activated, Time Delay settings define
the definite time that the Form 6 recloser control uses to
compare against TCC1 of phase, ground, or negative
sequence.
Phase, Negative Sequence, and Ground Time Delay
Units: seconds
Range: 0 to 100
4-32
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
High Current Lockout

High Current Lockout (HCL) defines which operations will
trip and lockout the recloser with no reclosing when the
specified current threshold is exceeded.
The HCL setting dialog box defines the phase, ground, and
negative sequence pickup settings and the operations that
will act on a specific setting.
Note: If HCL is active no subsequent reclosing occurs in that
sequence.
After making changes, always click OK before clicking CHANGE SETTING GROUP.
High Current Lockout (Phase, Neg. Sequence, and Ground)

Units: Amps
Range: 100 to 20000
Accuracy: ±5% and ±1 mA
4-33
Cold Load Pickup

Cold Load Pickup (CLPU) is used to prevent inadvertent
trips from occurring during pickup of load current.
The Cold Load Pickup dialog box enables you to program
the Form 6 recloser control with settings associated with the
specific curve characteristics when CLPU is active.
Just as in front panel programming, ProView application
software lets you modify minimum trip settings and all TCCs
within the curve library.
Cold Load Pickup modification categories include the following:
• Minimum Trip
• Selected TCC
• Time Multiplier
• Time Adder
• Minimum Response Time
• High Current Trip
• HCT Time Delay
• Reset Coefficient
The curve(s) last accessed in TCC Editor will load. • High Current Lockout
Select CHANGE
SETTING GROUP to
activate the
SETTING GROUP
SELECTION box.
After making
changes, always click
OK before clicking
CHANGE SETTING
GROUP. Otherwise,
the change will not be
registered.
Note: An error
message
appears if the
setting
entered is
outside the
value limits of
the setting.
There must be a TCC loaded (in each profile) in the parameter you want to import
prior to Importing Curve Parameters from TCC Editor.
For instance, if you want to import a Phase Operation Number 1 custom user curve,
a Phase 1 curve must be loaded in Normal, Alternate 1, Alternate 2, and Alternate 3
profiles.
IMPORTANT: When importing curve parame-

ters from TCC Editor, the curve(s) last
accessed in TCC Editor will load.
4-34
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Curve Type
The CLPU curve defines the shape of the TCC. There are
fifty unique curves available in the Form 6 recloser control.
The available curve types are:
• Kyle Curves 101 through 202
• Constant (definite time) Curves
• ANSI Inverse, Very Inverse, Extremely Inverse; IEC
Inverse, Very Inverse, Extremely Inverse; and five
custom curves (User 1 through 5)
Note: All curves, including User curves, can be viewed and modi-
fied using TCC Editor II.
Note: The Form 6 recloser control is a three-phase device; all
three phases trip on the settings programmed.
CLPUPCurve, CLPUQCurve, CLPUGCurve
F6 Curve F3 Cross F6 Curve F3 Cross

Name Reference Index Name Reference Index
Kyle 101 A 0 Kyle 137 V 25
Kyle 102 1 1 Kyle 138 W 26
Kyle 103 17 2 Kyle 139 16 27
Kyle 104 N 3 Kyle 140 3 28
Kyle 105 R 4 Kyle 141 11 29
Kyle 106 4 5 Kyle 142 13 30
Kyle 107 L 6 Kyle 151 18 31
Kyle 111 8*, 8+ 7 Kyle 152 7 32
Kyle 112 15 8 Kyle 161 T 33
Kyle 113 8 9 Kyle 162 K-Phase 34
Kyle 114 5 10 Kyle 163 F 35
Kyle 115 P 11 Kyle 164 J 36
Kyle 116 D 12 Kyle 165 K-Ground 37
Kyle 117 B 13 IEC Inv (200) n/a 38
Kyle 118 M 14 IEC VI (201) n/a 39
Kyle 119 14 15 IEC EI (202) n/a 40
Kyle 120 Y 16 Constant n/a 41
Kyle 121 G 17 ANSI Inv n/a 42
Kyle 122 H 18 ANSI VI n/a 43
Kyle 131 9 19 ANSI EI n/a 44
Kyle 132 E 20 USER1 n/a 45
Kyle 133 C 21 USER2 n/a 46
Kyle 134 Z 22 USER3 n/a 47
Kyle 135 2 23 USER4 n/a 48
Kyle 136 6 24 USER5 n/a 49
4-35
CLPU Minimum Trip (Phase, Negative Sequence, and Ground)
The CLPU Minimum Trip setting defines the Amperes at

which the TCC begins to time towards a time delayed trip
when CLPU is active.
Highlight current setting and type in new setting.
CAUTION: Equipment Damage. Verify the maximum
changing minimum trip values. Refer to Reference
to the recloser under load conditions. T310.0

CLPU Phase/Negative Sequence
Units: Amps
Range: 20 to 3200 (2000:1 CT Ratio)
10 to 1600 (1000:1 CT Ratio)
5 to 800 (500:1 CT Ratio)
Accuracy: ±5% and ±1 mA secondary for settings greater
than 10mA secondary
Front Panel LCD display designation:CLPUPMinTrip,
CLPUQMinTrip
CLPU Ground
Units: Amps
5 to 800 (1000:1 CT Ratio)
2 to 400 (500:1 CT Ratio)
Accuracy: ±5% and ±1 mA secondary for settings greater
than 10mA secondary
Front Panel LCD display designation:CLPUGMinTrip
4-36
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
CLPU Multiplier
Highlight current setting and

type in new setting. Check boxes to activate Multiplier.
The CLPU Multiplier defines a Time Multiplier to modify the

ability to enable the multiplier. With the CLPU Time
Multiplier enabled, the trip time of a given TCC at the mea-
sured current is shifted in time by the specific multiplier.
For example, if a curve has an operation time of 40 millisec-
onds and a multiplier of 2, the “modified” operation time
would be 80 milliseconds.
40 ms x 2 = 80 ms
Similarly, if the same curve has an operation time of 5
seconds, the multiplier produces a modified time of 10
seconds.
5 sec x 2 = 10 seconds
CLPU Multiplier
Units: Multiples of Min Trip
Range: 0.1 to 25
than 10mA secondary
Front Panel LCD display designation: CLPUPMult
CLPUQMult
CLPUGMult
4-37
CLPU Adder
Highlight current
setting and type in Check boxes to activate
applicable setting. applicable setting.
The CLPU Adder settings define a Time Adder to modify the

ability to enable it. With the CLPU time adder enabled, the
trip time of a given TCC at a measured current is shifted in
time by the specified additional time. In contrast to the
CLPU time multiplier, the CLPU time adder adds a constant
time to the curve, regardless of the unmodified curve.
seconds.
0.040 seconds + 1 second = 1.040 seconds
Similarly, if the same curve has a multiplier of 2 for an
operate time of 5 seconds, the one second time adder
would produce a modified time of 6 seconds.
5 seconds (2.5 seconds x 2) + 1 second = 6 seconds.
Note: The CLPU time multiplier takes precedence over the time
adder.
CLPU Adder (Phase, Neg. Sequence, and Ground)
Units: seconds
Range: 0 to 30
Front Panel LCD display designation: CLPUPAdd
CLPUQAdd
CLPUGAdd
4-38
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
CLPU Minimum Response Time Adder (MRTA)
Highlight and type in

applicable setting. Check boxes to activate CLPU MRTA.
The CLPU Minimum Response Time Adder (CLPUMRTA)

defines a minimum response time that modifies the shape
of the original TCC in time-current space for Cold Load
Pickup and the ability to enable the MRTA.
When enabled, the CLPU minimum response time of a
given TCC can be no less that the value of the MRTA.
TCC Editor II and imported using Form 6 ProView application
software. See Using TCC Editor II section of this manual.
CLPU MRTA (Phase, Neg. Sequence, and Ground)
Units: seconds
Range: 0.01 to 1.0
Front Panel LCD display designation: CLPUPMRTA
CLPUQMRTA
CLPUGMRTA
CLPU High Current Trip
The CLPU High Current Trip (HCT) settings define a cold load
pickup high current trip setting, a time delay, and an enable
setting to modify the shape of the selected CLPU TCC in
time-current space. If Cold Load Pickup HCT is enabled, the
shape of the TCC at currents beyond the HCT setting is def-
inite time as defined by the CLPU HCT time delay.
CLPU HCT (Phase, Neg. Sequence, and Ground)
Units: Multiples of Minimum Trip
Range: 1 to 32
than 10mA secondary
Front Panel LCD display designation: CLPUPHCT
CLPUQHCT
CLPUGHCT
CLPU HCT Time Delay (Phase, Neg. Sequence, and Ground)
Units: seconds
Range: 0.01 to 0.15
Front Panel LCD display designation: CLPUPHCTDly
CLPUQHCTDly
CLPUGHCTDly
4-39
CLPU Reset Coefficient
The Reset Coefficient settings define the rate at which the

control resets if a non-instantaneous reset is specified.The
reset coefficient is the equivalent of the mechanical reset of
induction disk controls. The reset time is determined by the
following equation:
• Reset Time = (TM*RCC)/(M2-1) where TM equals the
TCC Time Multiplier setting from the TCC Modifiers,
RCC is the reset coefficient setting, and M is the ratio
of the applied current to the minimum trip setting of
the TCC type.
Note: When Disk Reset is used, the reclose interval must be long
enough to allow the disk to fully reset to avoid faster than
expected tripping times encountered on successive shots.
CLPU High Current Lockout
Cold Load Pickup High Current Lockout (CLPU HCL)

defines HCL settings and a HCL Enable. If CLPU is
enabled, it will be enabled for the entire CLPU sequence.
The CLPU HCL settings define the phase, negative
sequence, and ground pickup settings.
Note: If CLPU HCL is active no subsequent reclosing occurs in
that sequence.
CLPU HCL (Phase, Neg. Sequence, and Ground)
Units: Amps
Range: 100 to 20000
Accuracy: ±5% and ±1 mA
4-40
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
User Curves
User Curves are user-defined, custom curves created in
TCC Editor II for the Form 6 recloser control. The User
Curves dialog box enables user curve data to be read from
the respective setting files (User1 settings.txt through User5
settings.txt). These files can be viewed with any text editor.
The curve(s) last accessed

in TCC Editor will load.
Import Curve Parameters from TCC Editor
There must be a TCC loaded (in each profile) in the parameter you want to
import prior to Importing Curve Parameters from TCC Editor.
For instance, if you want to import a Phase Operation Number 1 custom user
curve, a Phase 1 curve must be loaded in Normal, Alternate 1, Alternate 2, and
Alternate 3 profiles.
IMPORTANT: When importing curve parameters from

TCC Editor, the curve(s) last accessed in TCC Editor
will load.
4-41
CLPU Reclosing Interval
Select the number of trip operations (1, 2, 3, or 4). Time Length of Reclose Interval
Cold Load Pickup Reclosing defines the reclose interval for

CLPU trips and the number of CLPU Trip Operations to
Lockout.
CLPU Reclosing Interval
Units: Seconds
Range: 1.8 to 100
CLPU Control
Check box to de-activate Cold Load Pickup. Set Cold Load Pickup Activation time.
Set the Cold Load Pickup activation time or the CLPU Block
feature.
CLPU Activation Time
Units: Seconds
Range: 0 to 3600
Front Panel LCD display designation: CLPUActTime
IMPORTANT: Fault currents that extend beyond the CLPU

activation time will result in a composite TCC based upon
the active profile and CLPU TCC settings.
CLPU Block
Front Panel LCD display designation: CLPUBlock
Range: Yes or No
4-42
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Sensitive Earth
The Sensitive Earth Fault (SEF) feature is used on 3-wire
systems that require lower, independent minimum trip val-
ues than normal ground sensing.
Sensitive Earth Fault (SEF) allows the Form 6 recloser con-
trol to detect and authorize the recloser to trip after a selec-
table, definite time for ground currents above SEF minimum
trip levels. Sensitive Earth Fault has programmable lockout
settings and reclose intervals. Like all the features in the
Settings menu, Sensitive Earth Fault is independently
selectable for each protection profile.
Note: When the Ground Trip Blocked feature is Enabled, the
Sensitive Earth Fault feature is Disabled.
Sensitive Earth Fault feature requires four settings once it is
enabled:
• SEF Minimum Trip
• SEF Time Delay
• SEF Reclose Interval
• SEF Operations-to-Lockout
MINIMUM TRIP defines the pickup setting. Select CHANGE SETTING

GROUP to activate the
SETTING GROUP
SELECTION box.
After making changes, always
click OK before clicking
TIME DELAY (or CHANGE SETTING GROUP.
SEFTime in the Otherwise, the change will not
LCD Display) is be registered.
the actual,
definite time at
which SEF trips
the recloser.
Select the number

of trip operations
in a sequence.
RECLOSE INTERVAL is
the time delay introduced
by the control prior to
issuing a reclose
4-43
SEF Minimum Trip

Minimum Trip for Sensitive Earth Fault defines the pickup
IMPORTANT: Always verify the SEF minimum setting.
trip values are appropriate for the CT Ratio. SEF Minimum Trip
Units: Primary Amps
Range: 0.5 to 100A (2000:1 CT Ratio)
0.5 to 100A (1000:1 CT Ratio)
0.5 to 100A (500:1 CT Ratio)
Accuracy: ±5% or ±0.1mA secondary for settings greater
than 1mA secondary
Front Panel LCD display designation: SEFMinTrip
SEF Time Delay

Time delay for SEF is the actual, definite time at which the
sensitive earth fault trips the recloser.
SEF Time Delay
Units: seconds
Range: 0.1 to 300
Front Panel LCD display designation: SEFTime

Reclose or Open Interval settings define the intentional time
delay introduced by the control prior to issuing a reclose
Note: Sensitive Earth Fault reclose intervals are defined for sensi-
tive ground-only initiated reclosing operations.
Units: seconds
Range: 1 to 100
Front Panel LCD display designation: SEFRclInt
SEF Operations-to-Lockout
operations in a sequence before the control opens and
locks out. The count includes phase, ground, and negative
trip operations.
SEF Operations to Lockout
Range: 1 to 4
Front Panel LCD display designation: SEFNumOps
Block SEF Tripping

Set the Block Sensitive Earth Fault Tripping feature.
SEF Tripping Block
Range: Enable or Disable
Front Panel LCD display designation: SEFBlock
4-44
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Low Set
Low Set Overcurrent Protection is for programming and
enabling settings associated with the low-set definite-time
overcurrent. A separate pickup and time delay threshold is
provided for phase, negative sequence, and ground.
Select CHANGE SETTING GROUP to activate the SETTING

GROUP SELECTION box.
After making changes, always click OK before clicking CHANGE
SETTING GROUP. Otherwise, the change will not be registered.
Low Set Time

Low Set Pickup setting Check boxes to activate
Delay setting.
when definite time activates. applicable setting.
Pickup
Pickup defines the setting at which the definite time activates.
Phase and Negative Sequence Pickup
IMPORTANT: Always verify the pickup values
Units: Amps
10 to 1600 (1000:1 CT Ratio)
5 to 800 (500:1 CT Ratio)
than 10mA secondary
Ground Pickup
Units: Amps
5 to 800 (1000:1 CT Ratio)
2 to 400 (500:1 CT Ratio)
than 10mA secondary
Time Delay
Phase, Negative Sequence, and Ground Time Delay
Units: seconds
Range: 0 to 100
4-45
Voltage
The Voltage dialog box enables you to program the Form 6
recloser control under and overvoltage protection settings
for alarm and trip on system excursions from nominal.
Under and overvoltage settings are used for loss of voltage
detection and/or overvoltage applications.
• Undervoltage can be enabled for single-phase, three-
phase, or single-phase with three-phase inhibit mode.
• Overvoltage, when enabled, will automatically assert
for both single-phase and three-phase detection.
The overvoltage and undervoltage alarms must be config-
ured through the Workbench Inputs – Alarms toolbox.
Note: Non-latched system alarms will not illuminate the Alarm but-
ton on the front panel. Non-latched system alarms must be
programmed via the Idea Workbench to associate with a
front panel Indicator LED.
After making changes, always click OK before clicking CHANGE SETTING GROUP
Voltage settings have no effect on

protection modes until asserted by
checking the appropriate checkbox.
4-46
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
The settings and dialog control descriptions and their allow-
able setting limits are listed below.
Undervoltage Settings
The Undervoltage settings define the single and three-
phase tripping thresholds and delay times, as well as the
alarm pickup and time delay.
Single-Phase Undervoltage Pickup
Units: kV
Range: 0 to 200
Accuracy: ±5% and ±1 V
Front Panel LCD display designation: UVolt1PPU
Single-Phase Undervoltage Time Delay
Units: Seconds
Range: 0 to 100
Front Panel LCD display designation: UVolt1PTime
Three-Phase Undervoltage Pickup
Units: kV
Range: 0 to 200
Front Panel LCD display designation: UVolt3PPU
Three-Phase Undervoltage Time Delay
Units: Seconds
Range: 0 to 100
Front Panel LCD display designation: UVolt3PTime
Undervoltage Alarm Pickup
Units: kV
Range: 0 to 200
No LCD Display designation
Undervoltage Alarm Time Delay
Units: Seconds
Range: 0 to 3600
No LCD Display designation
4-47
Overvoltage Settings
The Overvoltage settings define the single and three-phase
tripping thresholds and delay times, as well as the alarm
pickup and time delay.
Single-Phase Overvoltage Pickup
Units: kV
Range: 0 to 200
Front Panel LCD display designation: OVolt1PPU
Single-Phase Overvoltage Time Delay
Units: Seconds
Range: 0 to 100
Front Panel LCD display designation: OVolt1PTime
Three-Phase Overvoltage Pickup
Units: kV
Range: 0 to 200
Front Panel LCD display designation: OVolt3PPU
Three-Phase Overvoltage Time Delay
Units: Seconds
Range: 0 to 100
Front Panel LCD display designation: OVolt3PTime
Overvoltage Alarm Pickup
Units: kV
Range: 0 to 200
Overvoltage Alarm Time Delay
Units: Seconds
Range: 0 to 3600
4-48
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Frequency
Frequency provides over and underfrequency protection as
well as a frequency restoration feature to allow the recloser
to automatically close when frequency returns within config-
ured settings for a user-settable time.
Any phase can be used for Frequency measurement and
protection as long as that phase is enabled in the
Configure: System Configuration dialog box.

After making changes, always click OK before
clicking CHANGE SETTING GROUP.
Define the
frequency level at
which the protection
becomes active.
Set time delay to
coordinate system
frequency functionality.
Dictates the restoration

schedule for the feeder in
relation to other feeders
on the system.
This timer runs when an Underfrequency action occurs until the

Restoration Abort Time setting expires. This timer will stop running
This timer runs when Schedule Timer
as a CLOSE occurs or an overcurrent fault occurs.
elapses and ensures the required
Set Schedule Time faster than the Restoration Abort Time. frequency is stable prior to closing.
The Schedule Timer can stop-and-
start if frequency fluctuates. For the
Transient Timer, the frequency must be
within the limits for the entire time in
order to close.
4-49
Under/Overfrequency Pickup
The Stage 1 and Stage 2 underfrequency and overfrequen-
IMPORTANT: Always verify the pickup and alarm cy pickup settings define the frequency level at which the
values are appropriate for the system frequency. protection becomes active. For underfrequency protection
to become active, the frequency level must be less than the
pickup setting. For overfrequency protection to become
active, the frequency level must be greater than the pickup
setting.
The Frequency dialog box enables you to set two overfre-
quency and two underfrequency pickup settings (Stage 1
and Stage 2). You can also set a single overfrequency
alarm and a single underfrequency alarm.
Stage 1 and 2 Alarm and Over/Underfrequency
Units: Hertz (Hz)
Range: 46 to 54 (50 Hz)
46 to 64 (60 Hz)
Accuracy: ± 0.005 Hz
Front Panel LCD display designation: UFreq1PU,
UFreq2PU,
OFreq1PU
OFreq2PU
Time Delays
Each under and overfrequency setting has a settable time
delay to coordinate system frequency functionality.
Stage 1 and 2 Time Delays
Units: seconds
Range: 0 to 100
Accuracy: ±5%
Front Panel LCD Display Designation: UFreq1Time
UFreq2Time
OFreq1Time
OFreq2Time
Under and Overfrequency Time Delay Alarm
Units: seconds
Range: 0 to 3600
Note: The over and underfrequency alarms have a factory-
defined 50 ms delay programmed into the feature to mini-
mize nuisance alarming.
Underfrequency Restoration
Underfrequency Restoration settings allow the user to spec-
ify if and when the feeder will automatically restore following
an underfrequency trip event. As long as the frequency
remains above the restoration frequency setting, the
restoration logic runs the Schedule Timer. The Schedule
Timer is an accumulated timer to provide coordination with
multiple devices. This timer dictates the restoration sched-
ule for the feeder in relation to other feeders on the system.
4-50
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Following an underfrequency loadshedding event, the Form
6 control continues to monitor system frequency. As long as
the frequency remains above the Restoration Frequency
setting, the restoration logic runs the schedule timer. If the
measured frequency drops below the Restoration
Frequency setting, the schedule timer will pause, but not
reset. The accumulated schedule time to this point is
retained and when system frequency once again rises
above the restoration frequency, the schedule timer
resumes its count from the point it left off.
All feeders on the system pause their own schedule timers
when the restoration of load elsewhere on the system
results in a momentary frequency decline, until system fre-
quency is restored to greater than the Restoration
Frequency setting. However, if while the schedule timer is
running, the system frequency again drops to below the
Stage 1 Underfrequency Pickup setting for the Stage 1
Time Delay setting or the Stage 2 Underfrequency Pickup
setting for the Stage 2 Time Delay setting, the correspond-
ing underfrequency loadshedding stage has again operated
system-wide. In this case, the schedule timer resets, so that
the orderly restoration of all open feeders can once again
commence as the system recovers.
When the schedule timer times out, the feeder is scheduled
to be restored. However, prior to actual restoration, the fre-
quency must also remain above the Restoration Frequency
setting continuously for the Transient Time setting. The
requirement for this final interval of continuous in-band fre-
quency is to ensure that the system has achieved relative
stability before additional load is restored. This postpones
restoration as long as momentary instabilities prevent the
transient timer from timing out. Such momentary instabilities
can be due to other, closely scheduled restorations occur-
ring elsewhere on the system, or due to other unpredicted
generation or switching events causing a momentary drop
in frequency.
If the Form 6 control is not able to successfully restore the
feeder within the Schedule Timer setting following an
Underfrequency Loadshed event, further restoration
attempts are abandoned at the conclusion of the
Restoration Abort Timer. This ensures that feeders are not
automatically restored during situations that prevent system
recovery within the Schedule Time setting.
Note: Even if the transient timer times out, restoration will be
inhibited if Overfrequency tripping is enabled and the fre-
quency is above the Stage 1 or Stage 2 Overfrequency
Pickup settings. If a fault trip occurs, the Form 6 control will
not participate in automated loadshed restoration, even
though frequency conditions and schedules may otherwise
dictate restoration.
Refer to the end of this section for an example of underfre-
quency restoration scheduling functionality.
4-51
Restoration Frequency
Units: Hertz (Hz)
Range: 46 to 54 (50 Hz)
46 to 64 (60 Hz)
Accuracy: ± 0.005 Hz
Front Panel LCD display designation: Freq:810R:PU
Restoration Abort Time
Units: seconds
Range: 0.1 to 3600
Front Panel LCD display designation: Freq:62Abort
Schedule Time
Units: seconds
Range: 1.0 to 3600
Front Panel LCD display designation: Freq:62Sched
Transient Time
Units: seconds
Range: 0.1 to 3600
Transient Timer Schedule Timer = 15 Seconds Abort Timer = 30 Seconds
30 30 Accuracy: ±5% and ±5 ms
5 5
25 25
.3 Front Panel LCD display designation: Freq:62Trans
20 20
15 10 15 10
When System Frequency

Abort Time Runs until 52A=1 or Timer Expires
goes below Stage 1
Pauses when Freq. is < Frequency must be
or 2 Pickup a Schedule
Restoration Frequency ≥ to Restoration
Frequency Timer Expires
Schedule Timer Runs and resets if Stage 1 or 2 Frequency for
Shedding Event Occurs
Underfrequency elements Transient Time
again operate
60.0
59.9
0.3 seconds
59.8
59.7
59.6
59.5
5 seconds
59.4
59.3
TIME
52A: 1
1
0 0
Stage 1 Pickup = 59.6
Stage 1Time Delay = 5 seconds
This is only an example of the Underfrequency Restoration Scheduling functionality.
Stage 2 Pickup = 59.3
Actual pick-up and time values will vary based on system requirements.
Stage 2 Time Delay = 0.5 seconds
Restoration Frequency = 59.9
4-52
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Directional
The Directional Supervision feature maintains system coordi-
nation from multiple sources, as well as circuit reconfigura-
tion for each protection profile. The Directional feature
applies to phase, ground, and negative sequence protection.
The Form 6 recloser control contains two directional func-
tions: a positive sequence function to provide directional
measurement for balanced three-phase faults, and a nega-
tive sequence function to provide directional measurement
for all unbalanced faults (phase-phase, phase-phase-
ground, and ground).

Maximum Torque Angle After making changes, always click OK before
applies to all Directional clicking CHANGE SETTING GROUP. Otherwise,
elements: Phase, the change will not be registered.
Ground/SEF, and
Negative Sequence.
Disable/Enable Directional Supervision through these menu options.

Note: Directional is set individually for each overcurrent protection setting
(Phase, Ground/Sensitive Earth, and Negative Sequence).
4-53
Maximum Torque Angle

The Maximum Torque Angle (MTA) defines the setting at
which the relative angle between the current and the volt-
age produce the greatest operate signal (or torque) from
the directional functions.
Note: One MTA is defined and applies to all Directional elements.
Maximum Torque Angle (MTA)
Units: Degrees
Range: 0 to 90
Accuracy: ±1 degree
Phase Directional Supervision

The Phase directional torque feature provides accurate
directional supervision for both balanced (positive
sequence) and unbalanced (negative sequence) faults.
Note: Current measuring functions are only supervised when
DIRECTION FORWARD or DIRECTION REVERSE are
enabled.
Negative Sequence
Directional Supervision
Negative Sequence directional torque feature provides
accurate directional supervision for unbalanced (negative
sequence) faults.
enabled.
Ground/Sensitive Earth
Directional Supervision
Ground/Sensitive Earth directional torque feature provides
accurate directional supervision for unbalanced (zero
sequence) faults.
enabled.
4-54
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Sync Check
The Form 6 recloser control contains capabilities to sync
check based on source and line-side PTs. The PTs are
assumed to be accurate and phase and magnitude supply
the control with a true sinusoidal signal. Sync Check is a
frequency measuring anticipatory close feature, with accom-
modation for static angles.
Sync check parameters must be set.
The sync check system is a permissive system used to
qualify any close signal to the mechanism, when the system
is enabled via the sync check settings. The sync check has
the ability to close for any combination of dead/live bus/line
condition and to perform anticipatory closing for a live
bus/live line condition by calculating the slip and leading the
close based on the mechanism closing delay.
The system slip is measured by comparing the sync PT (Vs)
(line) to the selected phase of the three phase BUS PTs.
The slip is then converted to an angular velocity, measured
in degrees/second. The mechanism operating delay setting
is utilized to calculate the “lead angle” or the angle prior to
top dead center (TDC) at which the close will be permitted.
After making changes, always click OK before clicking CHANGE SETTING GROUP. Otherwise, the change will not be registered.
Define the voltage conditions

allowable on the source (bus) and
load (line) side of the recloser.
Sync check parameter settings define the conditions

required to close a mechanism that has two
(potentially) independent systems on either side of it.
4-55
In addition to the anticipatory close calculation, the sync

check system performs verification on the line and bus volt-
age magnitudes and frequencies to determine that they are
within pre-determined ranges, and that the angular differ-
ence between the two systems is also within a predeter-
mined range.
For a Hot Line/Hot Bus close, where there is no slip
between the systems, the sync check system allows for
permissive closing after the two systems are within frequen-
cy and voltage limits, and the angular difference between
the systems has been within the allowable limits for a set-
table time.
Close Conditions
Close Conditions settings define the voltage conditions
allowable on the source (bus) and load (line) side of the
recloser for a close to occur.
For example, by enabling DEAD LINE/HOT BUS CLOSING,
the recloser allows a close when the source side of the
mechanism is live and the load side is dead. If HOT
LINE/HOT BUS is enabled (and Sync Check) is enabled,
the programmed synchronizing parameters are activated.
Sync Check Parameters

Sync Check parameters define the conditions required to
close a mechanism that has two potentially independent
systems on either side of it.
Voltage Angle
Voltage Angle defines the angle proximity of two voltage
phasors (line and bus) required for closing to activate.
Units: Degrees
Range: 0 to 90
Accuracy: ±1%
Mechanism Operating Delay
Kyle® Recloser Type Close Times Mechanism Operating Delay specifies the expected delay in
Closing closing the mechanism. This delay “anticipates” the actual
Time contact closing, and allows the sync close to “lead” the
Recloser Type (seconds) actual close when phasors are exactly in sync.
WE, WVE27, VWE, VWVE27,
WVE38X, VWVE38X Note: Refer to chart at left for Kyle® Recloser Type Close Times.
with Standard Line-to-Line Closing Coil 0.100 Units: Seconds
with Low Voltage Closing Coil Accessory 0.165
Range: 0.0167 to 0.5
VSA12, VSA16, VSA20,
Accuracy: ±5%
VSA12B, VSA20A 0.032
Static Angle
VSO12, VSO16 0.050
NOVA 0.045 Static Angle defines the time a close signal is permitted if
the line and bus phasors are within closing parameters, and
their angular relationship is not changing.
Units: Seconds
Range: 0 to 3600
Accuracy: ±5%
4-56
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Dead Threshold
Dead Threshold is the voltage used to compare to the line
and bus voltages to determine if the voltage should be con-
sidered “dead”. If the measured voltage is less than the
Dead Threshold, the line/bus is dead.
Units: Volts
Range: 0 to 200000
Accuracy: ±5%
Live Threshold
Live Threshold is the voltage used to compare to the line
and bus voltages to determine if the voltage should be con-
sidered “live”. If the measured voltage is greater than the
live threshold, the line/bus is live.
Units: Volts
Range: 0 to 200000
Accuracy: ±5%
Upper Voltage Limit
Upper Voltage Limit defines the upper voltage closing limit.
Units: Volts
Range: 0 to 200000
Accuracy: ±5%
Lower Voltage Limit
Lower Voltage Limit defines the lower voltage closing limit.
Units: Volts
Range: 0 to 200000
Accuracy: ±5%
Upper Frequency Limit
IMPORTANT: Always verify the frequency closing
limit values are appropriate for the system frequency. Upper Frequency defines the upper frequency closing limit.
Units: Hertz
Range: 56 to 64 (60 Hz)
46 to 54 (50 Hz)
Accuracy: ±0.005 Hz
Lower Frequency Limit
Lower Frequency defines the lower frequency closing limit
Units: Hertz
Range: 56 to 64 (60 Hz)
46 to 54 (50 Hz)
Accuracy: ±0.005 Hz
Fail to Close Timer
The Fail to Close Timer defines the length of time a sync close is
maintained. After the expiration of the Fail to Close Timer, the
close deactivates, and an alarm is activated.
Units: Seconds
Range: 0 to 3600
Accuracy: ±5 mS
4-57
Breaker Fail - LBB

The Form 6 control contains a Breaker Fail Indication/Local
Breaker Backup (BFI-LBB) for mechanism monitoring. LBB
is used for applications with a local backup breaker or
recloser in case the recloser is unable to clear the circuit
after a trip command.
The Breaker Fail-LBB dialog box contains a Pickup Delay
timer, a Dropout Delay timer, and an enable setting.
If lockout is enabled for the BFI-LBB logic, then the control
will issue a trip signal (BFI:Trip), and lockout.
The BFI:Trip signal is available in the Idea Workbench
Inputs Targets toolbox to allow the user to configure an out-
put contact I/O.
LBB Pickup Delay
Units: Seconds
Range: 0.3 to 10
Accuracy: ±5%
LBB Dropout Delay
Units: Seconds
Time set to delay the assigned I/O contact closure. Range: 0.2 to 10
Accuracy: ±5%
Time set to reset the assigned I/O contact closure

after the recloser returns to the normal state.
Example of basic logic for Breaker Fail - LBB.
4-58
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Incipient Cable Splice Fault

The incipient cable splice fault (ICSF) detector algorithm
recognizes the unique waveform characteristics that occur
in the days preceding a pending cable splice failure due to
water ingress. By monitoring how often this waveform foot-
print occurs over time, the user can obtain a highly reliable
indicator of impending cable splice faults.
Before a cable splice fails, water seeps into the splice caus-
ing a line-to-ground fault. The result is a waveform that is
best described as a 1/4 cycle self-extinguishing fault.
The second characteristic of incipient cable splice faults is
that they occur with increasing frequency over time. The
Form 6 control ICSF algorithm provides the ability to sense
the total number of occurrences as well as the number of
occurrences that occur during a programmable time period.
Note: Current limiting fuse operations can occasionally generate a
waveform that will be counted by the ICSF detector.
However, these events are very limited in number com-
pared to the number of counts that will occur prior to an
actual cable splice failure.
Refer to Front Panel Operation - Self Clear Fault Menu
section of this manual for additional information.
These green 0 alarm status indicators will Go Online to view SCF counters, rates, and alarms.
display as a red 1 if an SCF alarm is present.
4-59
Self-Clearing Fault Detection Enable

SCF:E
Range: 0 = N (Disable)
1 = Y (Enable)
Self-Clearing Fault Current Threshold

SCF:50
The fault current must exceed this level to initially arm the
ICSF logic. This would typically be set to 80% of the avail-
able short circuit current on the feeder. This prevents the
logic from registering excessive fault counts.
Units: Amps
Range: 1 to 10000
Self-Clearing Fault Alarm Pick-Up

SCF:CA
This is an absolute counter of the number of characteristic
waveform signatures detected.
Units: Counts
Range: 1 to 100
Self-Clearing Fault Rate Alarm Pickup

SCF:RA
This alarm will pick up and latch when Self-Clearing Fault
Rate Alarm Pickup (SCF:RA) faults are detected in the
SCF:W user-specified period of time.
Units: Counts per time period specified in the Self-
Clearing Fault Occurrence Rate Window (SCF:W)
Range: 1 to 100 per SCF:W
Self-Clearing Fault Occurrence Rate Window

SCF:W
This is the time period over which the number of counts is
evaluated. This is a sliding window.
Units: Hours
Range: 1 to 168
4-60
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Metering
The Metering Settings dialog box enables the user to pro-
gram Demand Metering, Alarm Data, and Power Factor
Setup.
The metering module of the control calculates and main-
tains the power-related settings for the demand integration,
alarm thresholds, and power factor alarms. All metering
information is programmed from the ProView interface soft-
ware. Information is viewed from the Form 6 recloser con-
trol front panel LCD display.
Set the time interval over which the peak demand current is calculated.
Select CHANGE SETTING GROUP to

activate the SETTING GROUP SELECTION
box.
After making changes, always click OK
before clicking CHANGE SETTING GROUP.
Set the Demand threshold limits. If any limit is

exceeded, the respective alarm is activated.
Set the Power Factor Alarm and Alarm Delay.
4-61
Demand Metering
Demand-metered values are programmed for a specific for-
ward or reverse metering direction.
The Demand Interval setting defines the time interval over
which the demand value is calculated.
Demand Interval
Units: Minutes
Range: 1 to 60
Accuracy: ±5 ms
The Demand Alarm Threshold settings define the measured
demand values. If any value limit is exceeded, the respec-
tive demand alarm activates.
Phase Current Threshold
Units: Primary Amps
Range: 10 to 2000
Accuracy: ±0.1%
Single-Phase Real Power (kW-1P) Threshold
Units: kW
Range: 10 to 15000
Accuracy: ±0.1%
Single-Phase Reactive Power (kVAr - 1P) Threshold
Units: kVAr
Range: 10 to 15000
Accuracy: ±0.1%
Three-Phase Real Power (kW - 3P) Threshold
Units: kW
Range: 10 to 15000
Accuracy: ±0.1%
Three-Phase Reactive Power (kVAr - 3P) Threshold
Units: kVAr
Range: 10 to 15000
Accuracy: ±0.1%
Power Factor Alarm Threshold
Units: per unit
Range: 0 to 1
Accuracy: ±5%
Power Factor Alarm Time Delay
Units: seconds
Range: 0 to 3600
4-62
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Presets
Counter Presets are the operation counter and trip counter
settings preset on a per-phase basis. Counters include:
• Ground and A, B, C Phase Targets
• Sensitive Earth Fault (SEF) Target
• Recloser Interrupting % Duty Cycle Used
Upon setting the counters or duty cycle information, clicking
on the Preset button will immediately download the values
to the control (provided the PC is connected to the control).
These items are not part of the setting file and are not
updated when a setting file is sent to the control from the
PC. This allows the user to make setting changes indepen-
dent of the counters.
Clicking OK will only save changes

until ProView goes online with the
control. At that time, any changes will
be overridden by the active scheme.
Clicking on the Preset button immediately

presets all of the counters to the values.
Therefore, you must enter the intended
values in all of the fields before clicking on
the Preset button.
Since ProView executes the preset
operation by modifying the values directly
on the control hardware, the Preset button
is only active if you have a communications
connection established with the control.
Trip and Target Counters
Trip and Target Counters are preset to zero for a new
recloser.
Note: If retrofitting an existing recloser, preset the control counters
to match the recloser counters.
Recloser Interrupting Duty Cycle

Each phase of the recloser incurs wear based on the cur-
rent interrupted and the number of times the interruption
occurs. The measurement of this wear is I1.5. The Counter
Presets are set to zero when used with a new recloser.
Note: If retrofitting an existing recloser, preset the control counters
to match the recloser counters.
4-63
MMI Setup and Password

The MMI Setup and Password dialog box is used to set the
Form 6 recloser control with the Settings password required
to access secured device settings through the control front
panel (MMI).
Password
Units: Up to four digits
Range: 0 to 9999
MMI Reset Menu
This menu lets the user choose what screen the Form 6
control front panel will revert to after a defined period of
inactivity. These choices are the same as some of the front
panel shortcut keys.
METERING SETTINGS
RESET OPER
TARGETS COUNTER
F1 F2 F3 F4
EVENTS ALARMS
LAMP TEST
MENU + CHANGE
ENTER —
MMI Reset Time

Front panel MMI auto-reset time after front panel inactivity.
Units: seconds
Range: 0 to 100000
MMI Message Time
Display time for Workbench-generated MMI text messages.
Units: seconds
Range: 0 to 5000
Display Power Saving Time
Inactivity time after which MMI backlight is dimmed (if power
saving is enabled).
Units: seconds
Range: 0 to 100000
Check box to enable

Display Power Saving Timer.
4-64
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Setting Groups Selector

The Setting Groups Selector dialog box enables the user to
Modify or View any of the four settings groups and program
the active group. This is accomplished via the Settings
Group Selection dialog box.
Active Profile is the setting (Normal, Alternative #1,
Alternative #2, Alternative #3) that is in use after it has been
downloaded to the control.
Edit Profile allows the user to view and change any of the
four setting profiles (Normal, Alternative #1, Alternative #2,
Alternative #3), including the active profile.
Note: Changes to the active profile will not become active until
the edited profile is downloaded to the control.
4-65
Copy Settings Group CAUTION: Equipment misoperation. Copying

! a setting group overwrites all settings in the
“Copy to Group” setting group. Unplanned or inadver-
tent changes to all of the settings in a setting group can
result in equipment misoperation, equipment damage,
and personal injury. T296.0
The Copy Settings Group dialog box enables the user to

copy profile settings from one setting group (Normal,
Alternative #1, Alternative #2, Alternative #3) to another.
4-66
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Settings File
The Settings File Read/Write dialog box allows the user to
read from a setting file or write the current user settings
from the control into a file.
All user settings can be read from and written to the soft-
ware files. The scheme stores these User Settings files with
the name Control_Settings_*.txt.
4-67
Settings List
The Settings List screen enables the user to view and print
the Key Settings List for the Form 6 control. This list shows
the following settings for each profile:
Overcurrent Settings
• Phase
• Ground
• Negative Sequence
• User Curve
Operations Sequence
• Phase/Neg Sequence
• Ground
Reclose Intervals
• Phase/Neg Sequence
• Ground
Cold Load Pickup
• Phase
• Ground
Frequency
• Underfrequency
• Overfrequency
• UF Loadshed Restore
ReclsTime and Control
Reclose Retry
Voltage
• Undervoltage
• Overvoltage
Sensitive Earth Fault
Directional Control
Low Set
• Phase
• Ground
Sync Check
4-68
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
4-69
Virtual Test Setup

The Virtual Test SetTM (VTS) enables the user to test
Settings and Idea WorkbenchTM programming. The VTS per-
mits the user to create a fault event and literally "play it"
through the logic contained within the Form 6 recloser con-
trol scheme file. The VTS generates virtual data as it would
normally be produced by the control hardware’s analog-to-
digital converter circuitry. During this playback, it is possible
to view the behavior of the control from the Application
Diagram view, any of the Oscillography views, or in the Idea
WorkbenchTM.
The VTS also permits the testing of multi-shot reclosing by
allowing faults to remain permanent for a given number of
reclose operations. Conversely, the VTS can be set to clear
a fault without control intervention, to simulate a remote
fault clearing event. The VTS also contains a full set of fre-
quency tools to test load-shedding algorithms.
There are two ways to configure the Virtual Test Set.
• Define actual current voltage and current magnitudes
during pre-fault, fault, and post fault conditions.
• Define a system model and initiate a fault. With this
method, the VTS computes the appropriate voltage
and current signals to generate.
Note: Changing VTS settings is not permitted while viewing an
event record opened from a file.
4-70
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Fixed Fault Setup
The Fixed Fault Setup box permits the user to select
whether the fixed phasors as defined in the dialog box or
the computed phasors resulting from the model method will
be used during the VTS event.
The settings are divided into three voltage and currents
sections: pre-fault, fault, and post-fault periods.
Note: There are no currents to define for the post-fault period as it
is assumed the breaker has cleared the fault. The time
duration of the pre-fault period is defined in the Fault
Dynamics Settings dialog box.
The Fault Dynamics dialog box controls the timing of when
the VTS switches from the pre-fault, fault, and post-fault
periods. Refer to Fault Dynamics Setup section of this
manual for additional information.
4-71
Model Fault Setup

The Model Fault Setup dialog box permits a fault type to be
specified. ProView will then calculate the appropriate pha-
sor values to be applied before (pre-fault) and during the
fault period. The result of these calculations can be seen in
the Results of Model Fault Calculation box after INIT (on
the Simulator Control bar) has been clicked on. Refer to
Show Model Results section of this manual for additional
information.
This box permits the user to select whether the fixed pha-
sors as defined in the dialog box or the computed phasors
resulting from the model method will be used during the
VTS event.
4-72
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Distance to fault
in per unit of the
specified ZL1
impedance.
For phase-to-phase-to-ground The value of the fault impedance as it applies to

faults, this is the impedance phase-to-phase, phase-to-ground, and balanced
applied between the two phases. three-phase faults between ground and the fault.
System Setup
This section of the Model Fault
Setup box contains all of the set-
tings necessary to define the sys-
tem impedance characteristics.
Note: All impedances are per unit.
The actual base unit is not
required, just that all quantities
are on the same base.
Setting Description Range
ZS0 Zero Sequence Source Impedance No limit

ZS1 Positive Sequence Source Impedance No limit
ZS2 Negative Sequence Source Impedance No limit
VS Voltage Source 0.5 – 2
ZL0 Zero Sequence Line Impedance No limit
ZL1 Positive Sequence Line Impedance No limit
ZL2 Negative Sequence Line Impedance No limit
Power Angle The angular difference between the local and remote bus Thevinen voltages. 0 – 360 degrees
ZR0 Zero Sequence Remote End Impedance No limit
ZR1 Positive Sequence Remote End Impedance No limit
ZR2 Negative Sequence Remote End Impedance No limit
VR Remote Source 0.5 – 2
One Per Unit L-N kV Value in Primary Volts for One Per Unit 1 – 25
DC-Offset Time Const The model parameters and fault incidence angle chosen may result in a
DC offset occurring during fault initiation. This setting defines the DC decay
time constant for fault currents. 1e-12 minimum
4-73
Show Model Results

The Model Fault Calculation dialog box shows the results of
the calculations from the values entered into the Model
Fault Setup dialog box.
Fault Dynamics Setup

The Fault Dynamics Setup dialog box contains the settings
that define how the Virtual Test Set progresses from the pre-
fault to fault, and then from fault to post-fault conditions.
The settings available in this dialog box are used for two
purposes:
• To control the pre-fault, fault, and post-fault transitions.
• To simulate system frequency shifts.
4-74
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Fault Dynamics Setup Dialog Box

Setting Description Range
Fault Application Time (T1) This is the number of seconds into the simulation that the VTS transitions No limit
from the pre-fault to fault conditions. This should be long enough for any
control algorithms to stabilize (approximately 0.1 sec).
Maximum Fault Duration (TD) Maximum fault duration in seconds. This timer starts when the fault No limit
initiates. After it expires, the VTS jumps to the post-fault phasors.
This timer resets with each reclose event.
Fault Clearing Time (TC) Maximum clearing time. Similar to Maximum Fault Duration, except this No limit
timer starts running at the beginning of the entire simulation and continues
running through all reclose events.
Simulation Halt Time (TE) This defines the maximum amount of time the simulation will free-run No limit
before automatically stopping. Counting starts at the beginning of the
whole simulation.
Recloser Mechanism The time delay that occurs before the virtual recloser in the VTS trips 0 –3600 seconds
Trip Delay after the scheme initiates a TRIP command. This time delay appears
in the time it takes for the current to stop flowing and for the simulated
52a contact to change status.
Slip from T1 to TC Change in system frequency that occurs at time T1 (fault). Frequency Delta Hz
restores to original frequency at time TC.
Slip’ from T1 to TC Rate of change of the system frequency that occurs at time T1. Hz/second
Slip’’ from T1 to TC Rate of acceleration of the rate of change of the system frequency
that occurs at time T1. Hz/sec2
Fault Box Settings

This drop down box enables the user to control how the
simulator interacts with the recloser scheme. Select from
the following settings:
• Fault Clears after First Trip: After trip, the Virtual Test
Set goes immediately to post-fault phasors.
• Fault Clears after Second Trip: Upon reclosing after
first trip, the VTS returns to the fault condition pha-
sors. After the second trip, the VTS goes to post-fault
phasors.
• Fault Clears after Third Trip: Upon reclosing after first
and second trips, the VTS returns to the fault condi-
tion phasors. After the third trip, the VTS goes to
post-fault phasors.
• Fault is Permanent: Upon any reclosing operation,
the VTS returns to fault condition phasors regardless
of how many times the control has tripped.
4-75
Simulation Settings
The user can save and/or restore all of the simulation set-
tings and create a whole library of standard simulations to
load and run as needed.
To save, view or load simulator settings, go to any of the
four options available in the Virtual Test Setup dropdown
menu.
Access the Simulation Settings from the Fixed Model Setup

or Model Fault Setup dialog boxes by clicking on MANAGE
SIMULATION FILES.
Access the Simulation Settings directly from the Show

Model Results or Fault Dynamics Setup dialog box.
4-76
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Read Simulation Settings

1. Click on READ SIMULATION SETTINGS FROM
DISK.
A standard Microsoft® Windows® Open File dialog box will
appear.
2. Select the file to read.
The file will open and the settings in this file will overwrite
any settings in the existing Fixed Fault Setup, Model Fault
Setup, and Fault Dynamics settings dialog boxes.
Save Simulation Settings
1. Click on WRITE SIMULATION SETTINGS TO DISK.
A standard Microsoft® Windows® Save As settings dialog
box will appear.
2. Assign a long, descriptive file name.
Note: It is recommended that the file name begin with the
string "Simulation_Settings_". This will result in showing
only VTS files when using the Read or View buttons.
For example, a file name of "Simulation_Settings_Close-
in Fault without reclosing.txt" is more descriptive than
"Simulation_Settings_Fault001.txt".
View Simulation Settings
1. Click on VIEW SIMULATION SETTINGS TO DISK.
A standard Microsoft® Windows® OPEN FILE dialog box will
appear.
2. Select the file to view.
The file will open with the program you have defined to
open *.txt files.
Note: For most systems this will be the Microsoft® Windows®
Notepad application, but it is possible to open and view this
file with any word processor or text editor.
4-77
Running a Simulation
After setting up the simulation parameters, select
Simulation from the Manage menu. The Simulation Control
Panel toolbar will appear.
To prepare the PC for the simulation, click INIT to begin ini-
tialization. If the scheme is not ready, a progress bar will
appear with the preparation status. When ready, the
Simulation Control Panel toolbar will reappear.
A simulation can now be run.
Note: It is recommended to run the simulation while viewing a
screen displaying oscillography, the Application Diagram, or
the Idea Workbench. Refer to the Display or Workbench
sections in this manual for viewing information.
The entire system becomes "live" during event playback
just as if the PC were connected to the Form 6 control in
View Online mode.
Click on STEP. Each click will play into the system one data
point for each voltage and current. The data points represent
simulated output from the control’s analog input channels.
Click on FREE-RUN to continuously generate signals until a
PC event record is generated. A PC event can be saved to
disk and reloaded at any time. Once the VTS has been
started and initialized, clicking TRIGGER EVENT will cause
a 200-sample event record to be recorded as a PC Event in
the Oscillographic Event Manager.
Note: PC Events triggered by the Virtual Test Set do not trigger
an event within the Form 6 control; however, they can be
saved and recalled as any other event.
4-78
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Configure
The Configuration Menu allows access to the following
System and Load-side PT Configuration functions
System Configuration
System Configuration allows the user to program the control
with the settings associated with the general system
arrangement and configuration. This dialog box lets you
program the following:
• System Configuration (includes Type and Primary
Rating for CT and PT)
• System Zero-Sequence Source Impedance
• Fault Locator (only available when three voltages are
supplied and all three Connected PT boxes are
checked)
• Manual Close Time Delay
• Duty Cycle Factor
• PT Connection (for BUS or Source-Side-PTs)
• Bushing Configuration (for both Source and Load-
Side PTs)
• System Rotation
• Connected PTs (on Bus or Source-Side)
The system configuration should be consistent with the
load-side PT configuration.
4-79
Refer to Customer Connections

section of appropriate Form 6
Recloser Control Installation
and Operation Instructions for
additional information.
The System Configuration
settings allow the user to IMPORTANT: Always verify the overcurrent
configure the control with protection minimum trip values are appropriate
the system frequency, CT for the CT Ratio. The Bushing Configuration
and PT type, ratio, and
settings allow the user to
rating.
specify which phase is
The PT Connection section allows the physically connected to
user to indicate whether the Connected which set of bushings on the
PTs are Wye or Delta. mechanism. A unique set of
bushing designations must
be selected for each phase.
The Pole
Mounted
Control box
must be
selected for
all Form 6 The System Rotation
Pole Mount section allows the user to
Recloser specify the system rotation
Controls. (ABC - phase rotation) or
This (ACB - phase rotation). This
includes data is used when
both pole calculating the proper inputs
and to the sequence filters, and
substation affect the negative
applications. sequence directional and
overcurrent elements.
Set Duty Cycle

Factor here
The intentional closing time delay after the
Form 6 front-panel CLOSE pushbutton is Enable or disable
pressed is defined here. Phantom Phase here. The Connected PT’s
section allows the user
to specify which phases
The line impedances have PTs physically
and length are connected to the
entered here. control. For directional
operation of the Form 6
control, all three PTs
must be connected.
4-80
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Load-side PT Configuration
The Load-side PT Configuration dialog box enables the
user to select the Connected PTs, set the PT Ratio and PT
connection (Wye or Delta), and enable or disable phantom
phase.
The load-side PT configuration should be consistent with
the system configuration.
4-81
Display
The Display Menu allows access to the following features:
• Sequence of Events
• Application Diagram
• Oscillography
• Data Profiler
• Factory Nameplate
Sequence of Events
The Form 6 recloser control contains capabilities to perform
Sequence of Events time-stamping for up to 33 event types.
This event recorder includes the date and time of the event
and appropriate metering analogs based upon event type.
Sixteen additional event types are user-defined through the
Idea Workbench.
The Sequence of Events Recorder maintains a minimum of
90 events.
The Sequence of Events screen provides date and time
stamped event data along with the instantaneous voltage
and current magnitudes for each phase at the time of the
event.
4-82
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Sequence of Events: Event Definitions

The Form 6 recloser control contains capabilities to perform
Sequence of Events (SOE) time-stamping for more than 33
event types (binary inputs). Sixteen event types can be
user-defined through the ProView Workbench™.
A minimum of 90 events will be available in the event
recorder. The most recent event appears at the top of the
event recorder. The event recorder uses a first in, last out
protocol.
NORMAL PROFILE: The Normal Protection profile is active.
Remains asserted while the control is in the Normal
Protection Profile.
ALT PROFILE #1: The Alternative #1 Protection profile is
active. Remains asserted while the control is in the
Alternative #1 Protection Profile.
BLOCK OF CLOSE: Asserts when closing is prohibited.
CLOSE FAILURE: Asserts if the recloser does not close
upon receiving a close command from any source.
CLOSE FAIL: SYNC: Asserts when sync check supervision
of closing is enabled and a close did not occur.
CONTROL ALARMS: The Control Alarm is asserted if a
Battery Alarm or No AC Power Alarm is asserted (Pole
Mount), or if a Memory Test or Internal Power Failure alarm
is detected. Remains asserted while the control has a con-
trol alarm asserted.
CONTROL LOCKOUT: Asserts when the control is locked-out.
Remains asserted while the control is in the lockout state.
CTL CKT INTRRUPT: Asserts when the control senses con-
trol circuit interruption (i.e. a disconnected or severed
cable).
FAULT DATA (pri): Asserts when an overcurrent trip signal
is given. Displays the maximum current two cycles after this
signal.
FREQUENCY TRIP: Asserts when an underfrequency or
overfrequency trip occurs.
GND TRIP BLK OFF: Asserts when Ground Trip Blocked
transitions from enabled to disabled.
GND TRIP BLK ON: Asserts when Ground Trip Blocked is
enabled.
HOT-LINE TAG OFF: Asserts while the control is not in Hot
Line Tag mode.
HOT-LINE TAG ON: Asserts while the control is in Hot Line
Tag mode.
4-83
MAN/EXT TRIP/LO: A Trip signal originating from an External

action, such as pressing the TRIP button, a DNP/Modbus
Trip command, or a Contact Input programmed to trip.
MANUAL/EXT CLOSE: A Close signal originating from an
External action, such as pressing the CLOSE button, a
DNP/Modbus Close command, or a Contact Input pro-
grammed to close.
NO CONTROL ALARM: Asserts after a Control Alarm resets.
NO CLOSE: FREQ: Close is inhibited because frequency is
not within the selected setting range.
NO CLOSE: TRP COIL: Asserts when trip coil monitoring is
absent.
NON-RECLOSE OFF: Asserts when Non-Reclosing transi-
tions from active to inactive
NON-RECLOSE ON: Asserts when Non-Reclosing is active.
OVERCURRENT TRIP: Asserts when the Trip signal origi-
nates from an overcurrent protective element action.
RAM REFRESH: Indicates the control reset (reloaded the
scheme in RAM and refreshed the memory) because a
Memory Test control alarm was asserted.
RCLS RETRY FAIL: Indicates the control failed to reclose
from Reclose Retry mode.
RECLOSE RETRY: Indicates a reclose signal was issued by
the control in a reclose retry attempt. Reclose retry attempts
subsequent reclose operations should a reclose attempt fail.
SEF TRIP: A Trip signal originating from a Sensitive Earth
Fault protective element action.
SELF-CLEAR FAULT: Asserts when an incipient cable
splice fault occurs.
SEQUENCE COORD.: The current displayed is the fault
current immediately prior to the sequence coordination
event. Remains asserted while the control records a
sequence coordination event.
SEQUENCE RESET: Indicates the fault was removed, the
recloser closed in and the operations-to-lockout count re-started.
Note: This event only occurs for an actual recloser trip. It will not
be displayed for a Sequence Reset due to a sequence
coordinated event.
TRIP FAILURE: Asserts if the recloser does not trip upon
receiving a trip contact.
VOLTAGE TRIP: Asserts when an undervoltage or overvolt-
age trip occurs.
The status of the 16 user-defined events are displayed on
the Form 6 front panel LCD in the WORKBENCH STATUS
menu display.
Refer to the Workbench Status Outputs to MMI and SOE
and Idea Workbench Outputs Toolbox sections of this
manual for additional user-defined event information.
Refer to Sequence of Events in the Display section of this
manual for additional event recorder information.
4-84
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Application Diagram
The Application Diagram provides a display of all logic ele-
ments, voltages, currents, watts, and vars of the Form 6
recloser control. This live display of the connected recloser
provides a quick summary of the distribution system and
the active control functions. The application program is also
ideal for testing or for providing a quick system overview via
modem connection.
IMPORTANT: The recloser

will respond to a command
issued from the Mechanism
Trip & LO and Close dialog
boxes regardless of the
Online or Offline status of
ProView when connected to
the Form 6 recloser control.
When ProView is connected If recloser status is unknown
to the Form 6 control, clicking (no control cable), these three
statuses will be displayed as Active features are Inactive features are
Trip and LO Recloser or
inactive: indicated by shaded, indicated by lighter boxes with
Close Recloser will Trip and solid boxes. (The a white circle in the lower-right
Lockout or Close the recloser Control is Locked Out
Open box color will be red corner. (The box color will be
even if ProView is offline. on the PC monitor.) green on the PC monitor.)
Closed
The Application Diagram screen shows the following views

under the following conditions:
• View Online Mode: Shows actual control data and
status. The display is continuously updated with live,
streaming data coming from the control.
• Event Playback Mode: Shows the status of the con-
trol at the time the oscillography event playback cur-
sor is set to. The display will change appropriately as
the event cursor is moved back and forth. Refer to
Oscillography in the Display section of this manual
for additional information.
• Simulation Mode: Shows the status of the simulated
control performance as the simulated event is
advanced. Refer to Virtual Test SetTM in the Settings
section in this manual for additional information.
4-85
Oscillography
The Display Oscillography feature enables oscillography
events to be played back through the control scheme, even
with altered settings. This feature allows the user to deter-
mine how the Form 6 recloser control would have behaved
for the same fault under different settings.
• Save future fault incidences with past fault perfor-
mance analysis.
• View accurate graphical events to compare actual
control performance against expected results.
Users can view event records using pre-defined oscillo-
graphic views or those from the Sequence of Events
recorder. Both actual event records and those created with
the Virtual Test Set (VTS) can be downloaded and viewed.
Note: A maximum of twelve 10-cycle events can be captured.
Generating Oscillographic Events

Oscillographic events are automatically generated under the
following conditions:
• When any fault current is detected.
• When the control sends a trip command to the
recloser.
• When the recloser goes to lockout.
• When optional signals are driven high from the Idea
Workbench.
Manually Triggering an Oscillography Event
Events can also be manually triggered from ProView as
follows:
1. Establish communication with the control. Refer to
Connecting to the Form 6 Control section in this
manual.
2. Select OSCILLOGRAPHIC EVENTS from the MAN-
AGE menu.
The Event Manager window will be displayed.
3. Click on TRIGGER to initiate a recording.
After the event is triggered on the control, transfer it to the
PC for viewing.
Note: You can also click on VIEW NEWEST EVENT ON DEVICE
to quickly transfer and view the event you just triggered.
4-86
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Viewing an Oscillography Event

To view oscillographic information, you must first load an
event record.
To load an event from the control:
1. Establish communication with the control. Refer to

Connecting to the Form 6 Recloser Control sec-
tion in this manual.
AGE menu.
The Event Manager window will be displayed. The lower
portion of the window, titled Device Events, will allow the
downloading of events from the control when connected to
the PC.
3. Click on the selected event from the DEVICE

EVENTS TIME/LENGTH drop-down menu.
4. Click on UPLOAD.
5. The SAVE AS dialog box will automatically open,

prompting you to save the file to disk.
Note: The file must be saved to the Form6 folder.
To load and view an event from a file:

AGE menu.
2. Click on VIEW EVENT FILE to bring up a list of
events stored on disk.
The Event Manager window will be displayed. The top por-

tion of the Event Manager is titled PC Events, and provides
the ability to load any event record that has previously been
saved to disk, or of any event records as created in the
Virtual Test Set (VTS) within ProView.
3. Select the file to open.
The event will be loaded and the Cursor Control Panel will
appear.
4. Click on the title bar, left-click-and-hold, and move the

Cursor Control Panel to a convenient location on the
screen.
4-87
5. To view any of the oscillographic views described,

click on the appropriate box on the Oscillography
Selection screen.
The oscillography view will appear.
6. Click and hold the time cursor in the Cursor Control
Panel and slide it through the entire oscillographic
event to accurately measure all analogs and deter-
mine function status.
Cursor control panel with

date and time stamping
Movable cursor controlled

by the cursor control panel
Magnitude of all displayed

waveforms at the cursor
location shown here
Oscillography Replay
Oscillography Replay enables the user to see how the Form
6 recloser control would behave for a loaded event record if
the settings were different. Use this feature as follows:
1. Change the settings and reload the event record.

Refer to Viewing an Oscillography Event in this
section for information on loading an event record.
The SELECT SETTINGS TO USE DURING EVENT VIEW-

ING dialog box will appear.
2. Click on USE SETTINGS FROM CURRENTLY

LOADED SCHEME.
Any changes made to settings in ProView will force it to dis-

play the same voltage and current waveforms and how they
interact with the new, current settings.
4-88
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Event Capture Settings

The Event Configuration Settings dialog box enables the
user to manually configure event setup parameters to use
when triggering events from the Oscillographic Event
Manager.
This dialog allows you to set the total and the pretrigger
length of non-manually triggered events as well as the
default event length for manual triggers from the
Oscillographic Event Manager.
If you uncheck the check box and do a

manual trigger a dialog box will appear
showing the default manual trigger event
length setting allowing you to change it.
4-89
Data Profiler
The Data Profiler is used for acquiring metering data for a
specific period of time. The Data Profiler is not automatic; it
must be manually configured. The Data Profiler is capable
of retaining metering data for each phase. The number of
data samples that can be retained is dependent upon the
number of metering forms used and the sample rate inter-
val.
By selecting the fewest and most appropriate metering
forms at a high sample rate, a large amount of metering
data can be acquired to determine the cause of many line
and power quality issues.
1. Select Data Profiler dialog box from the Display
menu.
2. Click the Configure button to display the Data Profiler

Configuration dialog box.
The metering options are listed on the left of the
screen. Use the scroll bar to view all of the options.
The Selected metering options listed on the right are
the active options. A metering option must be listed in
this field to be enabled.
3. Select metering options. Click the desired metering
option in the Available list, then click ADD >> or dou-
ble-click the metering option in the Available list.
Note: To remove a metering option from the selected list,
click on the metering option, then click << Remove.
4. Set the date the recordings are to start.
A Trend Time will be given in days and hours when
the Continuous feature is enabled. If 0 Hrs. is dis-
played, the start/stop times are set before the current
date.
Trend Time is the total amount of time the Data
Profiler can record. This time will vary and is depen-
dent on the sample rate and the number of metering
options selected.
Note: It is recommended to enable the Continuous feature
and check the Trend Time available.
A. Click the Continuous box if the recordings are not
to be stopped. A check mark appears when
enabled.
B. Set the stop date if Continuous is not enabled.
Make sure there is enough Trend Time available.
4-90
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
5. Set the Starting Time of Day the recordings are to
begin from the drop down menu.
6. Set the Duration of time the Profiler is to run each
day, beginning at the Starting Time of Day, from the
drop down menu.
7. Set the Sampling Interval from the drop down menu.
Frequent sampling rates decrease the amount of
Trend Time available.
8. Click OK to return to the Data Profiler screen.
The Data Profiler will display data only after the first
sampling interval.
9. Click the Write to File button to save the Data Profiler
data.
10. Select a profile view by clicking in a View selection
button.
• The Triggered view displays data initiated by an
alarm(s).
• The Periodic view displays data from periodic
sampling.
• The All view displays both the triggered and peri-
odic data.
4-91
Factory Nameplate
The Factory Nameplate dialog box displays the following
information:
• Scheme Number
• Custom Engineered Scheme Number
• Date Code
• ProView Version
4-92
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Metering
The Metering Menu provides access to the following

functions:
• Demand: Measured & Peak
• Instantaneous
• Symmetrical
• Counters
• Energy
• Lower Harmonics
• Higher Harmonics
• THD, True RMS
ProView must be connected to and online with the Form 6
control in order to view Metering values. Refer to the
Communicating with the Form 6 Recloser Control sec-
tion of this manual for the connection procedure.
Demand
Two Metering Demand options are available:

• Measured Demand
• Peak Demand
4-93
Measured Demand
The Measured Demand dialog box allows the user to view

the current and power (real and reactive) demands, based
on the Demand Interval Time setting in the Metering Settings
dialog box. Refer to Metering in the Settings section of this
manual for Demand Interval Time setting information.
The user must be online to view the demands in the con-
trol. The values displayed are the current period demand
readings.
Click the Go Online button. The current period demand
readings are displayed.
4-94
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Peak Demand
The Peak Demand dialog box allows the user to view the
current and power (real and reactive) peak demands and
times, based on the Demand Interval Time setting in the
Metering Settings dialog box, as measured since the last
reset. Refer to Metering in the Settings section of this man-
ual for Demand Interval Time setting information.
The user must be online to view the peak demands in the
control. The values displayed are the current peak demand
readings.
Click the Go Online button. The current peak demand read-
ings and times are displayed.
Click on RESET
PEAK DEMANDS to
reset the demands
and times from
ProView.
This can also be
accomplished via the
Form 6 control front
panel MMI. Refer to
Metering in the Front
Panel section of this
manual.
4-95
Instantaneous
The Instantaneous Metering dialog box allows the user to

view the voltage, current, frequency, and power (real and
reactive) values measured by the Form 6 control.
The user must be online to view the instantaneous values in
the control.
Click the Go Online button. The instantaneous values
are displayed.
4-96
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Symmetrical
The Symmetrical Metering dialog box allows the user to

view the voltage and current symmetrical component values
measured by the Form 6 recloser control.
The user must be online to view the symmetrical compo-
nent values in the control
Click the Go Online button. The current symmetrical compo-
nents values are displayed.
4-97
Counters
The Counters dialog box allows the user to view the coun-
ters retained by the Form 6 control.
The user must be online to view the counters in the control.
Click the Go Online button. The counter values maintained
by the control are displayed.
• Trip and Target Counters are preset to zero for a new
recloser.
• If retrofitting an existing recloser, preset the control
counters to match the recloser counters. If a Form 6
control is attached to a mechanism that has a
known operating history, the trip and target counters
and duty cycle information can be pre-programmed
into the control via the Presets dialog box. Refer to
the Settings - Presets in the ProView Form 6
Control Schemes section in this manual for addi-
tional information.
4-98
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Energy
The Energy dialog box allows the user to view the current
and power (real and reactive) energy values measured by
the Form 6 recloser control.
The user must be online to view the energy values in the
Click the Reset Energy button to reset the control.
accumulated energy from ProView. Click the Go Online button. The energy values are displayed.
This can also be accomplished via the Form
6 control front panel MMI. Refer to Metering
in the Front Panel section of this manual.
4-99
Lower Harmonics
Comprehensive harmonic information is included for three-

phase voltages and currents plus neutral current. This
analysis includes the second through eighth harmonics in %
of fundamental.
The user must be online to view the lower harmonic values

in the control.
Click the Go Online button. The lower harmonic values
are displayed.
4-100
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Higher Harmonics

phase voltages and currents plus neutral current. This
analysis includes the ninth through fifteenth harmonics in %
of fundamental.
The user must be online to view the higher harmonic values
in the control.
Click the Go Online button. The higher harmonic values
are displayed.
4-101
THD, True RMS

phase voltages and currents plus ground current. This analy-
sis includes total harmonic distortion in % of fundamental.
The user must be online to view the total harmonic distor-
tion values in the control.
Click the Go Online button. The Fundamental, True Root
Mean Square (RMS), and Total Harmonic Distortion (THD)
calculations are displayed.
Click the Related Low Harm or High Arm

buttons to access the Metering Lower
Harmonics or Higher Harmonics screens.
4-102
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Section 5: Idea WorkbenchTM

Introduction
ProViewTM software includes the Idea WorkbenchTM to cus-
WARNING: Recloser Misoperation. Power
! distribution equipment programming parame-
tomize hardware control and status points, serial communi-
cation points, front panel function keys, and LED status
ters and user-defined control logic hierarchies must indicators.
be properly configured and tested for the intended
application by competent personnel knowledgeable • Select and visualize a multiple logic gate connected to
of equipment limitations and safe operation prac- multiple arrays of functions by clicking and dragging.
tices. Failure to properly configure and test • Save your Idea Workbench files to be used again as
switchgear programming parameters and user-
needed, independent of your scheme.
defined control logic hierarchies can result in death,
severe personal injury, and equipment damage. • Quickly program your operating settings with stan-
G132.0 dardized dialog boxes, yet customize your applica-
tions with the Idea Workbench.
WARNING: Equipment Misoperation. Use • Default settings for the control and status points
! of an incompatible or inappropriate settings include common functions such as Recloser Lockout,
file, scheme file, or custom software file in a relay or Open, Close, Ground Trip Block, etc.
recloser control can result in equipment misopera- • Simple user-customization for Supervisory
tion leading to equipment damage, severe personal Inputs/Outputs, LEDs, and Operating functions
• Quick-connect graphic wiring
• Full SCADA input/output availability
CAUTION: Recloser Misoperation. Before
!
downloading configuration files or settings to • Operational I/O capability
the equipment, verify that the files and settings are The Workbench menu includes the following screen
correct for the location and application. selections:
Downloading configuration files or settings
designed for a different location or application can • Workbench Structures
result in severe personal injury and equipment • Workbench User Settings
damage. G133.0
• Workbench Contact Inputs
• Workbench Contact outputs
CAUTION: System Misoperation. The
! process of downloading a new scheme file • Workbench Message Outputs to MMI
will cause this device to stop functioning as a pro- • Workbench Status Outputs to MMI and SOE
tective device for a period of approximately 8 sec-
onds. Safe operating practices must be observed • Workbench Analog Outputs to MMI
while downloading scheme files. Failure to comply • Workbench MMI Softkey Switches
can result in system misoperation. T299.0
• Workbench Mode Control Configuration
• Workbench Description
IMPORTANT: The use of relays or recloser controls that

use the ProView operating system may result in the cre-
ation of many combinations of setting files, scheme files,
and custom software files. Many of these combinations
can be downloaded into any relay or recloser control using
the ProView operating system. The user must ensure that
the proper combination of software modules is created
and downloaded to the correct device for the application.
5-1
Important User Information

The Form 6 control offers the user the ability to apply it in a
variety of applications, to program its operation over a wide
range of parameters, and to customize its operating logic.
Those responsible for the application for the Form 6 control
must satisfy themselves that the programmed operating
parameters and the installed software scheme have been
tested to verify that they meet all performance and safety
requirements, including any applicable regulations, codes,
and standards.
Since there are many variables and user-selected operating
characteristics associated with any particular installation,
the user should take the necessary steps to assure that the
design, configuration, installation, and use of operating soft-
ware (schemes) are maintained in a secure and controlled
manner by properly trained personnel.
Accessing a Workbench Menu Item

Note: You must be logged in at the Modify access level to create
or modify the Idea Workbench. Refer to ProView
Login/Logout section of this manual.
1. Click on the Workbench main dropdown menu and
select a menu item.
Note: The Workbench Menu is only available when a
scheme is open.
A Workbench Warning screen will appear.

2. Read the contents of the WARNING screen and pro-
ceed as follows:
• Clicking on “I understand. Proceed with
Workbench modifications” causes the selected
Workbench screen to appear and enables you to
have full access to Workbench menu items.
• Clicking on “I do not wish to make Workbench
modifications at this time” returns you to the main
menu options with no access to any Workbench
menu items.
Each function of the Workbench menu and detailed instruc-
tions on accessibility and programming is described in this
section of the manual.
5-2
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Hardware Idea WorkbenchTM

The Idea Workbench allows the user to implement any type
of custom logic or algorithm with a simple and intuitive drag
and drop construction. The user can access any internal
signal, any contact input or output, values of analog inputs,
or communications inputs. Once the logic or algorithm has
been constructed, the result can be used to operate output
contacts or have other effects on the Form 6 recloser con-
trol. This logic can be analyzed during event playback or
with the Virtual Test Set (VTS) feature of ProView.
Loading the Hardware (Form6) Idea Workbench

All custom logic is part of the Hardware Idea Workbench.
Open the Hardware Idea Workbench by following the
Workbench>Workbench Structures menu path.
The Idea Workbench split screen will appear.
Click on the Hardware (Form6) Idea Workbench.
The Hardware (Form6) Idea Workbench will appear.
IMPORTANT: When you load a factory-supplied

Idea Workbench Structure from disk, you must
Click here to access also read the corresponding Idea Workbench
the Hardware (Form6) Setting from disk.
Idea Workbench.
Click here
to access Click on any
the User terminal block to
Workbench open up a view of Click here to open the
blocks. that terminal block. Color Key screen.
Click here to manage Workbench structures.
Click here to open the Basic Tools Toolbox.
Click here to open the Advanced Tools Toolbox.
Click here to open the Workbench Inputs Toolbox.
Click here to open the Workbench Outputs Toolbox.
Click here to open the Form6 Target LED

Programming Palette
5-3
Idea Workbench Structures WARNING: Equipment Misoperation. Use of

! an incompatible or inappropriate settings file,
scheme file, or custom software file in a relay or reclos-
er control can result in equipment misoperation leading
to equipment damage, severe personal injury, or
IMPORTANT: The use of relays or recloser con- death. G140.0
trols that use the ProView operating system may
result in the creation of many combinations of set-
ting files, scheme files, and custom software files. CAUTION: Recloser Misoperation. Before
Many of these combinations can be downloaded ! downloading configuration files or settings to
into any relay or recloser control using the the equipment, verify that the files and settings are cor-
ProView operating system. The user must ensure rect for the location and application. Downloading con-
that the proper combination of software modules figuration files or settings designed for a different loca-
is created and downloaded to the correct device tion or application can result in severe personal injury
for the application. and equipment damage. G133.0
All custom logic must be placed in one of the User

Workbench blocks.
Access the User Workbench blocks as follows:
1. Click on the Idea Workbench lightbulb graphic.
This will display the 16 separate blocks where the user can
design and segregate custom logic according to function.
2. Click on a block to open the User Workbench for that
block.
Custom logic can be placed in one block or divided across
many blocks.
Note: If complex logic is to be developed, the logic should be dis-
tributed across more than one User Workbench to maxi-
mize the readability of the logic.
5-4
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Changing User Workbench Block Names

The User Workbench block names can be changed to easi-
er identify the type of logic contained within that block.
Change the name of a User Workbench block as follows:
1. Right-click on the block whose name you want to
change.
2. Select Block>Configuration from the pop-up menu.
3. In the Name field of the resulting dialog box, enter the

new name.
4. Click on OK when done.
5-5
Contacts Inputs and Outputs

The Idea Workbench screen includes a representation of
the three terminal blocks on the rear panel of the Form 6
recloser control. Clicking on any of the terminal block repre-
sentations opens up a view of that terminal block.
• Contacts designated "ci" are contact inputs.
• Contacts designated "co" are contact outputs.
Contact outputs can only be used once in the Idea
Workbench. This prevents any potential misoperation of the
control that would result if an output contact were driven by
custom logic in two or more User Workbenches.
The background color of the labels on the contact inputs
and outputs reflect their current status. Refer to the Color
Key for contacts status.
Note: One contact output is designated as SS1, which is a high-
speed solid state contact that operates in less than 2 ms.
This is pre-assigned to be used to lockout the control.
The user can change the name designation of the contact
inputs and outputs. A short name can be assigned to the
contacts for use in the Idea Workbench view and a longer
name can be assigned for use in displaying the name of the
contact on the Form 6 control front panel MMI. Refer to
Workbench Contact Inputs and Outputs section in this
ProView Idea Workbench capabilities allow the user to cus-
tom configure the outputs of the Form 6 control for commu-
nications preferences, local targeting, and other user-
defined local or remote control.
Contact outputs are provided as Form A (normally open),
Form B (normally closed), or Form C (both normally open /
normally closed) contacts. Refer to the color key for contact
output types.
5-6
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Basic Tools Toolbox

At the upper-left corner of the Idea Workbench is the Basic
Tools toolbox. Click on the Basic Tools toolbox to open and
reveal the set of commonly used custom logic-building
tools.
Note: All custom logic must be placed in one of the User
Workbench blocks.
block.
many blocks.
Place a copy of any of these tools into the Idea Workbench
white space as follows:
Click on the tool icon and, while holding the left mouse but-
ton down, drag the tool icon off of the menu and move the
resulting cursor (a small black square) to the white space,
and then release the mouse button.
A copy of the tool will be placed in the Idea Workbench as
a ProView block.
Move the resulting block by using a left-click-and-hold to
grab the block and then move it. Release the left mouse
button to stop moving the block.
Delete the resulting block by using a left-click-and-hold to
draw a box around the tool. A menu will pop-up. Select
Scheme > Delete.
An example of
Idea Workbench
white space.
All contact outputs must be driven with an

input in order for the scheme to compile.
5-7
Basic Tools Toolbox
Two Input AND Gate
Two Input NAND Gate
NOT Gate (inverter)

Two Input OR Gate
EXCLUSIVE OR Gate
Two Input NOR Gate
Logic Rising Edge Detector

Set Priority Latch
Pickup Timer 2-Input Line Multiplexor
Dropout Timer
Reset Priority Latch
5-8
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Advanced Tools Toolbox
At the upper-left corner of the Idea Workbench is the
Advanced Tools toolbox. Click on the Advanced Tools tool-
box to open and reveal an advanced set of custom logic
building tools, including most mathematical operators.
Note: All custom logic must be placed in one of the User
Workbench blocks.
block.
many blocks.
Place a copy of any of these tools into the Idea Workbench
white space as follows:
Click on the tool icon and, while holding the left mouse but-
ton down, drag the tool icon off of the menu and move the
resulting cursor (a small black square) to the white space,
and then release the mouse button.
A copy of the tool will be placed in the Idea Workbench as a
ProView block.
Move the resulting block by using a left-click-and-hold to
grab the block and then move it. Release the left mouse
button to stop moving the block.
Delete the resulting block by using a left-click-and-hold to
draw a box around the tool. A menu will pop-up. Select
Scheme > Delete.
An example of
Idea Workbench
white space.
All contact outputs must be

driven with an input in order
for the scheme to compile.
5-9
Advanced Tools Toolbox
Two Input Equality Operator
Creates a Global Input Variable

Two Input Comparator
Creates a Floating Point Setting

Creates a Logic Setting
Creates a Complex Setting
Creates a Long Integer Setting
Feedback Operator
Creates a Short Integer Setting
Minimum Operator
Delay One Iteration
Maximum Operator
Array Lookup Operator
Negation Operator
Absolute Value Operator
Addition Operator
Complex Conjugate Operator
Subtraction Operator
Real-Part Operator
Multiplication Operator
Numeric Probe
(shows numeric value)
Imaginary-Part Operator
Logic Signal Probe

Division Operator
Non-Volatile sR Latch
Breaker Simulator
(not for use with the
Non-Volatile Sr Latch Form 6 control)
Designated for future add-ins.

Non-Volatile Floating Point PeerComm is available as an
Numeric Latch add-in. Contact your Cooper
Power Systems representative
for additional information.
Non-Volatile Short Integer

Numeric Latch
5-10
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Basic and Advanced Tools Characteristics

Once a tool is placed in the scheme, it will appear either as
a graphic image or as a box with text. The appearance of
the input and output terminals for the blocks vary between
these types.
For the logic gates, the input and output terminals can be
located by passing the mouse over the gate until the pointer
changes from an arrow to a square. Or, for example, a box
like :! or :# will appear.
• The :! indicates an input terminal.
• The :# indicates the output terminal.
For the latches and timers, small black squares on the
block indicate the terminals. The squares on the left are
inputs, and those on the right are outputs. The terminals
can be located by passing the mouse over the gate until a
box like :! or :# appears.
Workbench Icon Description

Name: Sr is a Set Priority latch
NV Sr is a Non-Volatile Set Priority Latch
Function: The single output terminal goes to a Logical 1 whenever the upper-most input ter-
minal (terminal 0) goes to a Logical 1. This Logical 1 output state will be maintained until
the input terminal 1 is set high.
Input terminal 0 (upper): Sets the latch output to 1.
Input terminal 1 (lower): Resets the latch output to 0.
If input terminals 0 and 1 are both at a Logical 1, the latch output is SET to a 1. This is SET
priority.
Name: sR is a Reset Priority Latch
NV sR is a Non-Volatile Reset Priority Latch
Function: The function is the same as the Set Priority Latch except that when input terminals
0 and 1 are both at a Logical 1, the latch output is RESET to a 0. This is RESET priority.
Name: Edge Detector
Function: Creates a Logical one pulse whenever its input transitions from a Logical 0 to a
Logical 1. The pulse disappears after 1/16 cycle.
Name: Magnitude Comparator
Function: Compares the value of the two inputs.
Input terminal 0 “+” (upper): The reference input quantity should be connected here.
Input terminal 1 “-” (lower): The quantity being compared to the reference input should be
connected here.
Output: The output goes to a Logical 1 if Input terminal 0 “+” is greater than Input terminal 1 “-”.
Name: Pickup Timer
Function: Timer starts timing when input transitions from a Logical 0 to a Logical 1. The
timer resets whenever the input drops back to a Logical 0 state.
Input terminal 0 (upper): When driven by a Logical 1, the timer starts running. When the
input changes to a Logical 0, the timer immediately resets to 0.
Input terminal 1 (lower): The value of the desired timer duration should be connected here.
Do this by dragging a "float setting" from the Advanced Tools Toolbox into the User
Workbench and connecting its output to this terminal.
Output terminal 0: Goes to a Logical 1 when the timer reaches its setting.
5-11

Name: Dropout Timer
Function: Output goes to a Logical 1 as soon as Input 0 goes to a Logical 1. The timer
starts timing when Input terminal 0 transitions from a Logical 1 to a Logical 0. The output
drops to a Logical 0 only after the timer expires.
Input terminal 0 (upper): When driven by a Logical 1, the timer is armed. When the input
changes to a Logical 0, the timer begins to count down to 0.
Input terminal 1 (lower): The value of the desired timer duration should be connected here.
Do this by dragging a "float setting" from the Advanced Tools Toolbox into the User
Workbench and connecting its output to this terminal.
Output terminal 0: Goes to a Logical 1 when Input 0 goes to a Logical 1. After Input 0 goes
to a Logical 0 the output stays at a Logical 1 until the timer reaches 0.
Name: Two Input Multiplexor (This function can’t be used to drive timers.)
Function: Passes one of two inputs to its output depending upon the state of the third input.
Input terminal 0 (upper): First input signal.
Input terminal 1 (middle): Second input signal.
Input terminal 2 (lower): Selector input. If a Logical 0, the first input is passed to the output.
If a Logical 1, the second input is passed to the output.
Name: Equality Operator
Function: Determines if the two inputs are equal. Both inputs must be of the same data type
(integer to integer, float to float, etc). Otherwise, it will cause an error message when
ProView prepares to download the logic to the control.
Input terminal 0 (upper): Value of first input quantity.
Input terminal 1 (lower): Value of second input quantity.
Output terminal 0: Goes to a Logical 1 when the values of the two inputs are equal.
Otherwise, a Logical 0 is output.
Name: Global Input
Function: To input the value of a global system variable to the Idea Workbench. This is for the
advanced user who is developing specific schemes that require low-level operating signals.
Usage:
1. To use the Global input, first drag one into the scheme.
2. Use the mouse to point to the Global input block and right-click.
3. Select Block Configuration from the resulting pop-up menu.
The Block Configuration dialog box will appear. The text "Global Input" will be in the Name field.
4. Replace this text with information as directed from the factory. As an example:
• "ExecSetup1": This is a binary output that changes to a Logical "1" at the
exact moment the control boot-up procedure has ended and the algorithms
start running. This signal indicates that the control has started functioning as a
control following start-up or a setting group change.
Function: All of these blocks provide the ability to introduce settings into the User
Workbenches. The name of each block describes the data type created for that setting.
Output (0): The value of the setting.
Logic Byte Setting This produces a binary setting that can be set to a 0 or 1 only. This is used to drive logic
gates, etc.
Float Setting This is a floating point setting. This is used to drive inputs such as timers, comparators, etc.
Complex Float Setting This is a complex, floating point setting. This is typically used to provide settings that are
involved in phasor math operations.
Short Integer Setting This is a 16-bit integer setting. The range goes from -32,768 to +32,768.
Long Integer Setting This is a 32-bit integer setting. It is used when an integer setting is required where the set-
ting range goes beyond +32,768.
5-12
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4

Name: Two Input AND Gate
Function: When both of the inputs at the left side of the AND gate are a Logic 1, the output
will be a Logic 1.
Name: Two Input OR Gate

Function: If either, or both, of the inputs at the left side of the OR gate are a Logic 1, the
output will be a Logic 1.
Name: NOT Gate (inverter)

Function: The output of this Logic function is inverted from the input signal.
Name: Two Input NOR Gate

Function: OR followed by an inverter. If either, or both, of the inputs at the left side of the
OR gate are a Logic 1, the output will be a Logic 0.
Name: Two Input NAND Gate

Function: AND followed by an inverter. When both of the inputs at the left side of the AND
gate are a Logic 1, the output will be a Logic 0.
Name: EXCLUSIVE OR Gate

Function: If either of the inputs at the left side of the EXCLUSIVE OR Gate are a Logic 1,
the output will be a Logic 1. If both of the inputs are a Logic 1 or both inputs are a Logic 0,
the output will be a Logic 0.
5-13
Using the Non-Volatile Analog Latches

The NV Latch Short and NV Latch Float blocks allow the
user to create logic to keep track of analog values even in
the event the control loses control power.

Name: Feedback
Function: This block is used to feed the output of a block to a part of the scheme that is
evaluated before the block the signal is taken from. This effectively passes the value of
the evaluated variable from the previous computation iteration and uses it in the current
iteration. Feedback is data type specific.
The usage is as follows:
fb
LOGIC
Name: Delay One Iteration

Function: This block is used to feed the output of a block to a part of the scheme that is eval-
uated after the block the signal is taken from. This effectively passes the value of the evalu-
ated variable from the previous computation iteration and uses it in the current iteration.
The usage is as follows:
LOGIC s(n-1) LOGIC
Name: Non-Volatile Floating Point Latch

Function: This module latches the value of the floating point signal driving its upper termi-
nal, input(0), while the BYTE Logic signal connected to the lower terminal Input (1) remains
asserted. The module output always shows the last value presented to Input (0) from the
most recent time that the capture input Input (1) was in the asserted (i.e. Logical 1) state.
This latching function is non-volatile, retaining the most recently latched value through
power cycling of the control.
Name: Non-Volatile Short Integer Latch
Function: This module latches the value of the short integer signal driving its upper terminal,
input(0), while the BYTE Logic signal connected to the lower terminal, input(1) remains
asserted. The module output always shows the last value presented to Input(0) from the
most recent time that the capture input, Input(1) was in the asserted (i.e. Logical 1) state.
The rest of the blocks' behavior is the same as for the non-volatile float latch.
Name: Array Lookup
Function: This module allows you to extract a single value from a one-dimensional array
variable. This is used primarily with the Global Input block where the Global signal being
accessed is an array.
Input (0): This is the top input port. Connect to this a short integer which indicates which
individual data point from the array is to be extracted. Note that the first value of the array is
index 0, not 1. So an array with 10 values is accessed by using index numbers 9 through 0.
Input (1): This is the bottom input port and the port to which the array variable is connected.
This can be of any data type.
5-14
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4

Name: Addition Operator
Function: The output is the addition of the two inputs. The input data types must be the
same.
Name: Negation Operator

Function: The output is the same magnitude as the input; however, of a different sign.
Name: Subtraction Operator

Function: The output is the subtraction of the bottom input from the top input. The input data
types must be the same.
Name: Absolute Value Operator

Function: The output is the absolute value of the input (magnitude only, no sign).
Name: Multiplication Operator

Function: The output is the multiplication of the values of the two inputs. The input data
Name: Division Operator

Function: The output is the division of the top input by the bottom input. The input data
Name: Complex Conjugate Operator

Function: This operator outputs the complex conjugate of the input. The input must be a
complex (x+j y) value. This operator will only be used when dealing with current or voltage
phasors.
Name: Real-Part Operator
Function: The output of this operator provides the real part of the input. The input must be a
complex value.
Name: Imaginary-Part Operator
Function: The output of this operator provides the imaginary part of the input. The input
must be a complex value.
Name: Numeric Probe (shows numeric value)
Function: This block displays the analog value of a signal.
Name: Logic Signal Probe

or
Function: This block displays the binary status value of a signal.
Name: Maximum Operator

Function: Two outputs - The top output displays the maximum value of the two inputs and
the bottom output displays a Logic 1 if the top input is greater than the bottom input. If the
top input is less than the bottom input or if the inputs are equal, the bottom output is a Logic
0. The input data types must be the same.
Name: Minimum Operator

Function: Two outputs - The top output displays the minimum value of the two inputs and
the bottom output displays a Logic 1 if the top input is greater than the bottom input. If the
top input is less than the bottom input or if the inputs are equal, the bottom output is a Logic
0. The input data types must be the same.
5-15
Workbench Inputs Toolbox

Workbench Inputs toolbox. Click on the Workbench Inputs
toolbox to display all the possible input signals that can be
used in the Idea Workbench.
The Workbench Inputs toolbox gives the user access to vari-

ous physical and communications system inputs as well as
the ability to perform logical functions with the Basic and
Advanced Tools.
To access the menu function in a user-defined Workbench
scheme, click the desired Workbench input, drag it off the
menu, and place it in the Workbench area. Use this
Workbench input to create the desired logic functions.
The Menu options are described below:
User Intermediate Signals
Twenty-five intermediate variables are provided to allow sig-
nals to be sent between Workbench blocks. Intermediate
variables are defined (driven) from the User Intermediate
Signals menu of the Workbench Outputs toolbox. Once
defined, the intermediate variables can be used by dragging
them out of the User Intermediate Signals menu of the
Workbench Inputs toolbox.
User Workbench Settings
Enable Settings
WB enable settings 1 - 4 allow the user to create logic func-
tions within the workbench that can be enabled/disabled via
the Workbench User Settings dialog. Separate settings can
be entered for each of the four profiles (Normal, Alternate 1,
Alternate 2, Alternate 3). A WB Enable is a byte setting
identical in function to the "Advanced Tools" "Logic Setting -
BYTE", although the WB Enable can be enabled/disabled
from outside of the workbench environment.
For example, a user could enable/disable a user created
logic function by ANDing the function with one of the WB
enables. Then the user can enable/disable the function from
within the Workbench User Settings dialog.
5-16
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Threshold Settings
WB threshold settings 1–4 allow the user to create thresh-
olds whose values will be used in mathematical functions
within the workbench. Once the function is created, the
threshold value can be changed within the Workbench User
Settings dialog. Separate settings can be entered for each
of the four profiles (Normal, Alternate 1, Alternate 2,
Alternate 3). A WB Threshold is a floating point setting iden-
tical in function to the "Advanced Tools" "Float Setting",
although the WB threshold value can be modified from out-
side of the Workbench environment.
Protection Mode Status
Protection Mode Status menu elements provide annuncia-
tion of all Form 6 recloser control protection mode enables.
Additionally, this menu provides four individual elements to
annunciate the active status of the four protection profiles.
Protection Settings
Protection Settings menu elements annunciate the active
profile, provide minimum trip settings for all four profiles,
and provide active minimum trip settings.
Protection Element Status
Protection Element Status menu elements provide annunci-
ation for 20 TCC, CLPU, SEF, Phase, and Ground timing
and trip status indicators. The first 10 logic elements indi-
cate the Timing Active status of the individual protection ele-
ments and the last 10 logic elements indicate the Tripped
Due To status of the individual protection elements.
Additionally, this menu provides a Reverse Power Flow ele-
ment that becomes a logic "1" when the Form 6 control
senses a Reverse Power Flow condition.
Standard I/O Control Input Status
The Standard I/O Control Input Status menu provides ele-
ments to annunciate the status of contact inputs CI1, CI2,
and CI3 on TB1.
Optional I/O Control Input Status
The Optional I/O Control Input Status menu provides eight
additional elements to annunciate the status of Contact
Inputs CI4 through CI11 on TB3.
Note: The Optional I/O Control Input Status elements are only
valid when an Optional I/O accessory is installed in the
Form 6 control.
Current and Voltage Inputs
The Current and Voltage Inputs menu contains 20 elements
that provide Current and Voltage magnitudes and Current
and Voltage Phasors.
5-17
Symmetrical Components
The Symmetrical Components menu provides a total of six
analog elements. three elements for Symmetrical Current in
primary units, 3I0, I1, 3I2, and three elements for
Symmetrical Voltage in secondary units 3V0, V1 and V2.
Demand Currents
The Demand Currents menu provides four elements to
annunciate demand current peak values for A, B, and C
Phase and Ground.
Communications
The Communications menu is divided into two categories:
• The DNP Communications menu provides two ele-
ments, one for Pulsed Binary Outputs and one for
Latched Binary Outputs. These outputs can be used
multiple times.
Note: DNP elements are only active and for use when DNP
is installed on the Workbench.
IMPORTANT: The user must ensure the appropriate

Binary Output type (latched or pulsed) is applied to the
desired Workbench Output function.
• The MODBUS Communications menu provides ten

elements representing Modbus Binary Output regis-
ters 00023 - 00032. These Binary Outputs can be
used only once and are user-defined. Modbus Binary
Outputs 1 - 17 are factory-defined, 18 - 22 are not
available, and 23 - 32 are user-definable.
Note: Modbus elements are only active and for use when
Modbus is installed on the Workbench.
Recloser Status
The Recloser Status menu provides 14 elements to annun-
ciate recloser status, an additional 2 elements to annunciate
Reclose Retry Active and Reclose Retry Lockout, and one
Battery Test Active element.
Voltage Status
The Voltage Status menu contains three elements to
annunciate the presence of Bus Voltage for A, B and C
phases and one logic element to annunciate the Sensing
Voltage Alarm Status.
Sync-Check
The Sync-Check menu provides four elements to annunci-
ate sync-check statuses and six elements to annunciate
enabled and measured sync-check Close conditions.
Blocking Status
The Blocking Status menu provides elements to annunciate
the blocking status of Phase Overcurrent, Negative
Sequence Overcurrent, Battery Test, Oscillography, Lock
Status for Target Counters, and Lock Status for All
Accumulators (excluding Targets).
5-18
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Targets
The Targets menu provides elements that annunciate the
status of various protective functions.
All targets are latched until an unlatching event occurs
(unless otherwise noted). Targets can be de-asserted either
manually (via a remote or local target reset signal) or auto-
matically, based on a user-settable time delay after a suc-
cessful close operation. Targets are also superseded by any
subsequent tripping action of the control.
The Default Targets menu provides elements to annunciate
the status of the 25 Form 6 control front panel LEDs.
Refer to Auxiliary Targets in this section for information
regarding the 23 auxiliary targets.
Frequency Detection
The Frequency Detection menu provides 10 elements to
indicate Frequency related quantities and status.
Four elements annunciate the status of under and overfre-
quency loadshed, one provides Frequency Restoration sta-
tus, three provide Frequency Measurement analogs, and
two validate Frequency Measurement.
Current Detection
The Current Detection menu provides a total of six ele-
ments, two of the elements annunciate detection of any sin-
gle or three phase current. The remaining four elements
annunciate Fault Detection results.
Front Panel Pushbutton Status
The Front Panel Pushbutton Status menu provides a total
of 12 elements. The first nine elements indicate actuation of
the User Configured Option Buttons located on the Form 6
recloser control MMI. Two elements indicate actuation of
the Trip and Close front panel pushbuttons. One element
indicates the Change button is active.
LCD Panel Switches
The LCD Panel Switches menu provides four elements to
indicate actuation of the MMI Softkey Pushbuttons.
Alarms
The Alarms menu provides a total of 28 elements to annun-
ciate Control, System, and Collected alarms.
Non-Latched Demand Alarms
The Non-Latched Demand Alarms menu provides a total of
17 elements to annunciate Demand alarms.
Incipient Cable Splice Faults
The Incipient Cable Splice Faults menu provides a total of
14 elements to annunciate A, B, and C phase Realtime
Incident Detection and Count and Non-Realtime Summary,
Rate, and Count Alarms.
5-19
Time of Day
The Time of Day menu provides seven elements to indicate
Minutes, Hours, Day of Week, Day of Month, Day of Year,
Month, and Year.
Note: The values represented by these elements are all Short
Integers. Short Integers are any number between 0 and
32,000. To conditionalize custom logic based on time, you
must compare their values to Short Integer settings
obtained from the Advanced Tools toolbox.
Most Recent Fault
The Most Recent Fault menu provides a total of 15 ele-
ments to annunciate the time, type duration, location and
magnitude of the first trip of the most recent fault. All values
are generated by fault locator algorithms.
Note: The values represented by these elements are all Short
Integers. Short Integers are any number between 0 and
32,000. To conditionalize custom logic based on time, you
must compare their values to Short Integer settings
obtained from the Advanced Tools toolbox.
Note: The fault locator requires three voltages to be present
for proper calculation of the fault location. Refer to
System Configuration in Configure section for addi-
tional information.
Data Profiler
The Data Profiler menu provides one element to annunciate
the Data Profiler status.
Loop Scheme (Optional)
The signals in this menu are only available for Form 6 con-
trols with the LS option installed. The Loop Scheme menu
provides 13 intermediate variables to allow signals to be
sent between Workbench blocks. There are also three
Timers Are Running Signals.
Auxiliary Targets:
A Phase Fault Trip
A target indicating that the A-phase current was either the
maximum phase current or within 80% of the maximum
when a trip signal was issued.
1 = An A-phase trip occurred.
B Phase Fault Trip
A target indicating that the B-phase current was either the
1 = A B-phase trip occurred.
C Phase Fault Trip
A target indicating that the C-phase current was either the
1 = A C-phase trip occurred.
5-20
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Ground Fault Trip
A target indicating that a Ground tripping function was
asserted at the time the trip signal was asserted.
1 = A ground involved trip occurred.
SEF Trip
A target indicating that the sensitive Earth fault tripping
function was asserted at the time the trip signal was
asserted.
1 = An SEF trip occurred.
Voltage Trip
A target indicating that an overvoltage or undervoltage trip-
ping function was asserted at the time the trip signal was
asserted.
1 = A voltage involved trip occurred.
Frequency Trip
A target indicating that an overfrequency or underfrequency
tripping function was asserted at the time the trip signal was
asserted.
1 = A frequency involved trip occurred.
CLPU P/Q Trip
A target indicating that Cold Load Pickup Phase or Negative
Sequence function was asserted at the time the trip signal
was asserted.
1 = A Cold Load Pickup phase or negative sequence trip
occurred.
CLPU Gnd Trip
A target indicating that a Cold Load Pickup Ground tripping
function was asserted at the time the trip signal was
asserted.
1 = A Cold Load Pickup ground involved trip occurred.
P/Q Trip
A target indicating that Phase or Negative Sequence func-
tion was asserted at the time the trip signal was asserted.
1 = A phase or negative sequence trip occurred.
BFI-LBB: Trip
A Breaker Failed/Initiate Local Breaker Backup condition
was detected because the local mechanism did not trip in
the desired time after issuing a trip signal to the mecha-
nism. Breaker fail action should be initiated.
1 = A breaker fail condition exists, and a trip and lockout
signal has been sent to the connected mechanism.
Note: This is not a maintained signal and is only active while the
condition exists.
5-21
Interrupter Malfunction: Trip

An Interrupter malfunction has been detected in the con-
nected mechanism. Current did not extinguish within five
seconds of the trip signal being issued. Breaker fail action
should be initiated.
1 = An Interrupter malfunction condition exists, and a trip
and lockout signal has been sent to the connected
mechanism.
condition exists.
Above Minimum Trip
A target indicating one of the currents through the recloser are
above one of the Minimum Trip (phase, ground, or negative
sequence, or CLPU thresholds, if CLPU is active) settings.
1 = The measured current is above one of the minimum
trip thresholds.
condition exists.
TCC1 Ground Above Min. Trip
A target indicating the calculated residual current through
the recloser is above the TCCG Minimum Trip setting and
that TCC1 is the active TCC.
1 = The calculated residual current is above the TCCG
threshold and TCC1 is timing.
condition exists.
TCC2 Ground Above Min. Trip
the recloser is above the TCCG Minimum Trip setting and
that TCC2 is the active TCC.
1 = The calculated residual current is above the TCCG
threshold and TCC2 is timing.
condition exists.
TCC1 Phase Above Min. Trip
A target indicating one of the currents through the recloser
is above the TCCP Minimum Trip setting and that TCC1 is
the active TCC.
1 = The measured current is above the TCCP threshold
and TCC1 is timing.
condition exists.
TCC2 Phase Above Min. Trip
is above the TCCP Minimum Trip setting and that TCC2 is
the active TCC.
1 = The measured current is above the TCCP threshold
and TCC2 is timing.
condition exists.
5-22
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
TCC1 Negative Sequence Above Min. Trip
A target indicating the calculated negative sequence current
through the recloser is above the TCCQ Minimum Trip set-
ting and that TCC1 is the active TCC.
1 = The calculated negative sequence current is above
the TCCQ threshold and TCC1 is timing.
condition exists.
TCC2 Negative Sequence Above Min. Trip
through the recloser is above the TCCQ Minimum Trip set-
ting and that TCC2 is the active TCC.
1 = The calculated negative sequence current is above
the TCCQ threshold and TCC2 is timing.
condition exists.
CLPU Phase Above Min. Trip
is above the CLPUP Minimum Trip setting and that Cold
Load Pickup is active.
1 = The measured current is above the CLPUP threshold
and the CLPUP TCC is timing.
condition exists.
CLPU Ground Above Min. Trip
the recloser is above the CLPUG Minimum Trip setting and
that Cold Load Pickup is active.
1 = The calculated residual current is above the CLPUG
threshold and the CLPUG TCC is timing.
condition exists.
CLPU Negative Sequence Above Min. Trip
through the recloser is above the CLPUQ Minimum Trip set-
ting and that Cold Load Pickup is active.
1 = The calculated residual current is above the CLPUQ
threshold and the CLPUQ TCC is timing.
condition exists.
5-23
Workbench Outputs Toolbox

Workbench Outputs toolbox. Click on the Workbench
Outputs toolbox to display all the possible output signals
that can be used in the Idea Workbench.
The output variables are those elements, modes or func-
tions other than contact outputs that can be changed and/or
driven by custom logic.
Note: These outputs can only be driven once. All logic used to
drive these outputs must be in a common User Workbench.
Unused signals appear on a gray background in the
Workbench Output Toolbox. Once they have been dragged
into the scheme, the box background changes to white.
The Workbench Outputs toolbox gives the user access to

various inputs, intermediate variables, and internal Form
6 recloser control alarms, status’ and targets, and gives
the user the ability to perform logical functions with these
variables.
User Intermediate Signals Menu
Twenty-five Intermediate Variables are provided to allow
easy use of signals from one Workbench block to another.
The Intermediate Variables are available as inputs to the
Outputs Workbench, but can also be driven as outputs from
the Input Contact Workbench.
Digital Oscillography Signals
Drive the following signals from the Workbench, Logic only:
52a – Status of the connected mechanism (0=open,
1=closed).
52a: not – Status of the connected mechanism (52 b con-
tact)(1=open, 0=closed).
Trip Mechanism – Trip signal to the mechanism (1=Trip).
This signal is asserted for a minimum of 50 ms, and
remains asserted while the tripping condition is in place.
Close Mechanism – Close signal to the mechanism
(1=Close) This signal is asserted for a minimum of 25 ms,
and remains asserted until the unit successfully closes,
times out, or receives a trip signal (1=Close).
Locked Out – Status of the Control (1=Lockout).
SEF Trip – A target indicating that the sensitive Earth fault
tripping element was asserted at the time the trip signal was
asserted (1=An SEF trip occurred).
Above Min. Trip – A target Indicating that one of the cur-
rents sampled by the Form 6 recloser control is at, or
above, one of the following minimum trip settings (Phase,
Ground, Negative Sequence, or CLPU).
5-24
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Frequency Trip – A target indicating that an overfrequency
or underfrequency tripping element was asserted at the
time the trip signal was asserted (1=A frequency involved
trip occurred).
Voltage Trip – A target indicating that an overvoltage or
undervoltage tripping element was asserted at the time the
trip signal was asserted (1=A voltage involved trip
occurred).
Ground Fault Trip – A target indicating that a Ground trip-
ping element was asserted at the time the trip signal was
asserted (1=A ground-involved trip occurred).
P/Q Trip – A target indicating a Phase or Negative
Sequence element was asserted at the time the trip signal
was asserted. (1=A phase or negative sequence trip
occurred.)
CLPU P/Q Trip – A target indicating that Cold Load Pickup
Phase or Negative Sequence element was asserted at the
time the trip signal was asserted (1=A Cold Load Pickup
phase or negative sequence trip occurred).
CLPU Gnd Trip – A target indicating that a Cold Load
Pickup Ground tripping element was asserted at the time
the trip signal was asserted (1=A Cold Load Pickup ground
involved trip occurred).
Control Active Profile
Control Active Profile and (@) Alternative Profile Controls
Normal Profile and @Normal Profile – Of the four setting
groups available in the Form 6 control, the Normal Group
(or Profile) is currently active (1=Normal setting group is
active).
Alternate Profile 1 and @Alternate Profile 1 – Of the four
setting groups available in the Form 6 control, the
Alternative 1 Group (or Profile) is currently active
(1=Alternative 1 setting group is active).
Control Protection Modes (High Priority)
Note: The Form 6 recloser control modes of operation can be
modified from within the Idea Workbench. Refer to
Workbench Mode Control Configuration section of this
The following Outputs are Conditioned by Precedence
settings:
Ground Trip Blocked - Hi Pri – Setting this output to a logi-
cal 1 sets the control in Ground Trip block mode.
5-25
Non-reclosing - Hi Pri – Setting this output to a logical 1

sets the control in non-reclosing mode.
CLPU Block - Hi Pri – Setting this output to a logical 1 sets
the control in Cold Load PickUp mode.
SEF Block - Hi Pri – Setting this output to a logical 1 sets
the control in Sensitive Earth Fault Mode.
Seq Coord Enabled - Hi Pri – Setting this output to a logical
1 turns on the Sequence Coordination feature.
Fast Trips Block - Hi Pri – Setting this output to a logical 1
turns on the Fast Trips Blocked Feature -TCC1 curves are
removed from service and inverse time tripping will occur
based on the TCC2 curves.
UFreq Trips Enable - Hi Pri – Setting this output to a logical
1 enables underfrequency tripping.
OFreq Trips Enable - Hi Pri – Setting this output to a logical
1 enables overfrequency tripping.
1P UV Trips Enable - Hi Pri – Setting this output to a logical
1 enables single-phase underfrequency tripping.
3P UV Trips Enable - Hi Pri – Setting this output to a logical
1 enables three-phase underfrequency tripping.
Overvoltage Trips Enable - Hi Pri – Setting this output to a
logical 1 enables overvoltage tripping.
Reclose Retry Enable - Hi Pri – Setting this output to a logi-
cal 1 enables the Reclose Retry feature.
Sync-Check Enable - Hi Pri – Setting this output to a logical
1 enables sync-check.
The @Alternative Control Outputs Control Protection
Modes (High Priority) menus provides alternative access to
the same above-referenced items.
Control Protection Modes (Low Priority)
Note: The Form 6 recloser control modes of operation can be
modified from within the Idea Workbench. Refer to
Workbench Mode Control Configuration section of this
The following signals are Momentary - Conditioned by
Precedence settings:
Ground Trip Blocked - Lo Pri – Setting this output to a logi-
cal 1 sets the control in Ground Trip block mode.
Non-Reclosing - Lo Pri – Setting this output to a logical 1
sets the control in non-reclosing mode.
CLPU Block - Lo Pri – Setting this output to a logical 1 sets
the control in Cold Load PickUp mode.
SEF Block - Lo Pri – Setting this output to a logical 1 sets
the control in Sensitive Earth Fault Mode.
Seq Coord Enabled - Lo Pri – Setting this output to a logi-
cal 1 turns on the Sequence Coordination feature.
5-26
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Fast Trips Block - Lo Pri – Setting this output to a logical 1
turns on the Fast Trips Blocked Feature -TCC1 curves are
removed from service, and inverse time tripping will occur
based on the TCC2 curves.
UFreq Trips Enable - Lo Pri – Setting this output to a logical
1 enables underfrequency Tripping.
OFreq Trips Enable - Lo Pri – Setting this output to a logical
1 enables overfrequency tripping.
1P UV Trips Enable - Lo Pri – Setting this output to a logical
1 enables single-phase underfrequency tripping.
3P UV Trips Enable - Lo Pri – Setting this output to a logical
1 enables three-phase underfrequency tripping.
Overvoltage Trips Enable - Lo Pri – Setting this output to a
logical 1 enables overvoltage tripping.
Reclose Retry Enable - Lo Pri – Setting this output to a logi-
cal 1 enables the Reclose Retry feature.
Sync-Check Enable - Lo Pri – Setting this output to a logical
1 enables sync-check.
The @Alternative Control Outputs Control Protection Modes
(Low Priority) menus provides alternative access to the
same above-referenced items.
Torque Control
Normal
• Control Ground TCC Torque
• Control Neg Seq TCC Torque
• Control Phase TCC Torque
When CLPU is Active
• Control CLPU Ground TCC Torque
• Control CLPU Neg Seq TCC Torque
• Control CLPU Phase TCC Torque
Blocking
These outputs block Phase Trips, Negative Sequence Trips,
Oscillography, and Battery Testing. Blocking persists only
while associated output is asserted.
User Status Outputs to MMI and SOE
Sixteen events can be user-defined. Drive the signals from
the Workbench (use Logic only). The event names can be
customized for the Form 6 front panel LCD and the
Sequence of Events recorder.
Note: Refer to Workbench Status Outputs to MMI and SOE in
the Workbench section of this manual for additional event
renaming information.
Note: Refer to Sequence of Events in the Display section of this
manual for additional event recorder information.
User Message Outputs to MMI
Fourteen text messages can be user-defined. Messages
can also be cleared and refreshed.
Note: Refer to Workbench Message Outputs to MMI sec-
tion of this manual for customization information.
5-27
User Analog Outputs to MMI

Use "float" signals only.
Note: Refer to Workbench Analog Outputs to MMI sec-
tion of this manual for customization information.
Option Button LEDs
Operator Panel One-Touch Function Keys
(top row of buttons L-to-R)
• Option Button #7 LED – Setting this output to a logi-
cal 1 turns on the LED for Option Button #7.
(middle row of buttons L-to-R)
(bottom row of buttons L-to-R)
IMPORTANT: Each Option LED indicator can be config-

ured for multiple tasks.
When investigating the cause of an illuminated Option LED
indicator always verify if it has been configured to indicate
more than one type of event, state, alarm, etc.
Special
Hot Line Tag
• HLT On – Setting this output to a logical 1 turns on
the Hot Line Tag function.
• HLT Off – Setting this output to a logical 1 turns off
the Hot Line Tag function.
Supervisory
• Supervisory Off – Setting this output to a logical 1
turns on the Supervisory Off function.
• @Alternative Control Outputs – Accomplishes the
same as above.
Reset Functions
• Reset Targets – Setting this output to a logical 1
resets all targets.
• Reset Alarms – Setting this output to a logical 1
resets all alarms.
5-28
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
• Reset Recloser – Setting this output to a logical 1
gives the user the ability to immediately reset the
sequence position back to zero.
Note: The default logic will prevent a reset if there is fault
current present.
Note: The front panel LCD Diagnostics menu screen dis-
plays the sequence position of the recloser connect-
ed to the Form 6 control.
Note: This output provides the same type of function as
Reset Time through the ProView Settings menu.
Refer to the Reclosing in the Settings section in
this manual for additional information.
• Reset SCF Counters – Setting this output to a logical
1 gives the user the ability to immediately reset the
SCF Counters back to zero.
Note: The front panel LCD Self-Clear Fault menu screen
also allows the user to Reset Fault Data.
Note: This output provides the same type of function as
Clear SCF counters through the ProView Settings
menu. Refer to the Incipient Cable Splice Fault in
the Settings section in this manual for additional
information.
Control Recloser
• Trip and Lockout – Setting this output to a logical 1
will initiate a Trip and Lockout signal.
• Trip with Reclose – Setting this output to a logical 1
will initiate a Trip signal (Control may issue a reclose
signal dependent on sequence position and control
OCP programming).
• Close – Setting this output to a logical 1 will initiate a
Close signal.
• Block of Close – Setting this output to a logical 1 will
initiate a Block of Close signal.
Oscillography Controls
• Trigger Oscillography – Setting this output to a logical
1 will initiate an Oscillographic event.
Battery Operations
• Test Battery – Setting this output to a logical 1 will ini-
tiate a Battery Test.
Lock Accumulators...(...lock all except Target Counters)
• Activate Test Mode – Setting this output to a logical 1
will initiate Test Mode.
Note: The front panel Test Modes menu screen also allows
the user to activate Test Mode (except for Targets).
(...lock Target Counters)
• Lock Target Counters – Setting this output to a logical
1 will lock the target counters.
Note: The front panel Test Modes menu screen also allows
the user to lock the target counters.
5-29
Front Panel
• Wake Up Front Panel – Setting this output to a logical
1 will illuminate active Front Panel LEDs and turn on
the LCD Display Backlight.
Data Profiler
Configure up to ten metering options not already available
with the Data Profiler. Drive the signals from the
Workbench, use Analogs only:
• WB Data Profiler (#01) through (#10)
Refer to Data Profiler in the Display section of this manual
for additional information regarding available metering
options.
Drive the following signals from the Workbench, Logic only:
• WB Trigger Data Profiler
• WB Enable Data Profiler
Form6 Target LED Programming Palette

Click on the Form 6 control icon to access the Form 6
Target LED Programming Palette. This palette enables you
to drag off any LED icon that is not already driven and pro-
gram its control logic.
Note: All Target LEDs are already driven in the default scheme.
Delete unused targets from the Target LED Programming
Workbench before attempting to drive targets from the
Programming Palette.
Building Custom Logic

Note: You must be logged in at the Modify access level to create
or modify the Idea Workbench. Refer to ProView
Login/Logout section of this manual.
To build custom logic, a collection of input signals and logic
blocks are gathered into a User Workbench white space.
Connections are made between these blocks by drawing
"wires" between the desired blocks outputs and inputs
through normal click-and-drag movements.
many blocks.
5-30
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Adding Elements to the Idea Workbench

1. Open an unused User Workbench:
A. Click on the Idea Workbench lightbulb graphic.
This will display the 16 separate User Workbench
blocks where the user can design and segregate
custom logic according to function.
B. Click on a block to open the User Workbench for
that block.
2. Click on the Workbench Inputs button to gain access
to all of the input signals available in the Idea
Workbench.
3. Click on the Workbench Outputs button to gain
access to all of the output signals available in the
Idea Workbench.
The inputs and outputs of ProView blocks are represented

as small black dots on the right edge (inputs) or left edge
(outputs) of the block.
Every output must be driven by an input.
4. Connect inputs to outputs as follows:
A. Place the mouse pointer above an input dot until
a small text appears. This indicates that you are
ready to make a connection.
B. Left-click and drag the connection (forming a vir-
tual wire) to the output terminal of the desired
ProView block.
Note: You will know you are properly on top of a
ProView output terminal when the text box
appears.
C. Release the mouse button.
The connection will now be represented on the screen by a
virtual wire between the input and output blocks.
5-31
Organizing the Idea Workbench

If extensive custom logic is to be created, even dividing the
custom logic into all 16 of the available User Workbench
block can result in some very complex screens when
dozens or hundreds of logic elements are added.
To decrease this clutter, and thereby increase the ability to
trace the custom logic, blocks can be created to hold the
logic:
1. Draw a box around the custom logic added to the
Idea Workbench.
A. Place the mouse in the white-space of the Idea
Workbench, left-click-and-hold, and draw a box
around the logic.
B. Release the left mouse button.
The box remains and a menu will appear.
2. Select Scheme>Group from this menu.
This will create a new block that contains the logic enclosed
in the original box.
3. Right-click on the block (in either its open or closed
condition) and select Block>Configuration from the
pop-up menu.
The Block configuration screen will appear.

4. Enter a name in the Name field and click OK.
5. Close this new block by clicking on the standard

Microsoft® Windows® application close button (X) in
the upper-right hand corner of the block.
Left-clicking on the closed block will open the block.
Right-clicking on the closed block allows you to select
Scheme>Ungroup, if desired.
Note: If some of the wires or blocks only partially appear on the
screen after extensive customization, left-click in the white
space to refresh the graphics.
5-32
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Workbench Files
At the upper-left corner of the Idea Workbench is a button
labeled Workbench Files. Click on this button to display the
menu options.
Manage Multiple Idea Workbenches and Setting Files

It is possible to maintain multiple Idea Workbenches that
can be loaded into ProView at any time. This feature pro-
vides the ability to reuse Idea Workbench constructions or
to build up a library of standard constructions. Additionally,
multiple setting files for all of the settings in a Workbench
can also be maintained.
Customize a Workbench Description

Click on Change Workbench Name to customize a
Workbench description.
Note: This feature is also available via the
Workbench>Workbench Description menu or the
Settings>Simplified Setup screen.
5-33
Load, Save, and View Workbench Settings

All settings created in the Idea Workbench are kept sepa-
rate from the Form 6 control settings. These settings can be
saved to and loaded back from an ASCII text file of the form
“WBI_Form6_Settings_*.txt”.
• Click on READ IDEA WB SETTINGS FROM DISK to
load settings from a previously created file.
Note: Form 6-LS control users must load the Form 6-LS
default settings from here.
• Click on WRITE IDEA WB SETTINGS TO DISK to
save settings to an ASCII file.
• Click on VIEW IDEA WB SETTINGS ON DISK to
open the ASCII settings file with the default Microsoft®
Windows® text editor.
Load Custom Workbench Modules

Cooper Power Systems or other third party developers may
create custom Workbench modules to load into a
Workbench.
• Click on LOAD CUSTOM WB MODULE and browse
to the name of the custom Workbench module to load
a custom module.
Custom Workbench modules are available to registered
ProView users at http://www.cooperpowercentral.com. Log
in and click on the Software link on the left side of the
screen. Select the ProView link from the next screen.
IMPORTANT: Save the Workbench with the loaded custom

module(s) as a new Workbench file name.
Load and Save Workbench Structures

All of the custom logic structures created in the Idea
Workbench can also be saved and stored separately from the
main control file itself. These structures can be saved to and
loaded back from a *.sch file of the form "WBI-Form6-*.sch".
• Click on LOAD IDEA WB STRUCTURE to load set-
tings from a previously created file.
Note: Form 6-LS control users must load the Form 6-LS
default Workbench scheme from here.
• Click on SAVE IDEA WB STRUCTURE to save set-
tings to a file.
This is the appearance of the default Form 6-LS Workbench

when the LS structure is loaded and the LS settings have
been read from disk.
5-34
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Communications WorkbenchTM
Configuring Protocol Communications
The Form 6 recloser control has user-selectable implemen-
tation of ProView-based DNP3, Modbus, IEC870-5-101,
2179, and DNP TCP/IP communications.
Communication protocols are configured via a
Communications Workbench. General use of the
Communications Workbench follows the concept of the Idea
Workbench. Refer to the Hardware Idea Workbench section
of this manual for additional menu and screen information.
Loading a Communications Workbench

Communication Protocols are loaded as part of the
Communications Workbench.
Open the Communications Workbench by following the
Workbench>Workbench Structures menu path.
The Idea Workbench screen will appear.
Click on the Communications Idea Workbench.
The Communications Workbench will appear.
Click here to access

the Communications
Workbench.
The name of the active protocol

appears above the icon.
Click here to access the DNP3

Communications Workbench blocks.
(DNP3 is the default protocol.)
Click here to manage Workbench structures.
Click here to open the Basic Tools Toolbox.
Click here to open the Advanced Tools Toolbox.
Click here to open the Workbench Inputs Toolbox.
5-35
Workbench Files
At the upper-left corner of the Communications Workbench
is a button labeled Workbench Files. Click on this button to
display the menu options.
Manage Multiple Communications Workbenches and Setting Files

It is possible to maintain multiple Communications
Workbenches that can be loaded into ProView at any time.
This feature provides the ability to reuse Communication
Workbench constructions to build up a library of standard
constructions. Additionally, multiple setting files for all of the
settings in a given workbench can also be maintained.
Read, Write, and View Communications Workbench Settings

All settings created in the Communications Workbench are
kept separate from the Form 6 control settings. These set-
tings can be saved to and loaded back from an ASCII text
file of the form “WBC_Form6_Settings_*.txt”.
• Click on READ COMM WB SETTINGS FROM DISK
to load settings from a previously created file.
• Click on WRITE COMM WB SETTINGS TO DISK to
save settings to an ASCII file.
• Click on VIEW COMM WB SETTINGS ON DISK to
open the ASCII settings file with the default Microsoft®
Windows® text editor.
5-36
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Load Custom Workbench Modules

Cooper Power Systems or other third party developers may
create custom Workbench modules to load into a
Workbench.
• Click on LOAD CUSTOM WB MODULE and browse
to the name of the custom Workbench module to load
a custom module.
IMPORTANT: Save the Workbench with the loaded custom
module(s) as a new Workbench file name.
Load and Save Communications Workbench Structures

All of the custom logic structures created in the
Communications Workbench can also be saved and stored
separately from the main control file itself. These structures
can be saved to and loaded back from a *.sch file of the
form "WBC-Form6*.sch".
• Click on LOAD COMM WB STRUCTURE to load set-
tings from a previously created file.
• Click on SAVE COMM WB STRUCTURE to save set-
tings to a file.
5-37
Change the Active Communication Workbench Protocol

Change the active communication protocol as follows:
1. Click on the Workbench Files button.
2. Click on LOAD COMM WB STRUCTURE.
3. Select and open a protocol from the menu options.
The selected Communications Workbench protocol will

become active.
5-38
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
DNP Workbench
All Communications changes must take place in the appro-
priate Workbench. The Form 6 control allows users to cus-
tom configure DNP3 points and settings.
Access the DNP Workbench as follows:
1. Click on the DNP Workbench graphic.
The DNP Workbench blocks will appear.
2. Click on the applicable block.
Note: The DNP default point database is in the
Cooper/ProView40/Form6 folder. The document title is
dnpf6dat.xls.
Click here to access the HTML

Refer to DNP Basic, Advanced, and screen that displays the DNP
Unsolicited Settings sections for Tables that were created during
screen information. the last scheme compilation.
Click here to open the

input toolboxes.
Click here to access factory-

Refer to DNP I/O Map assigned and user analog, binary,
Settings section for and counter inputs mapping.
screen information.
These outputs and

inputs should only be
used with Form 6
controls equipped with
the loop scheme option.
Click here to access factory-assigned

and user Binary Output Mapping.
DNP Binary Outputs 0 - 31 (including
Future A - L) are factory-assigned and
not intended for customer use. Users
should begin with BO-032 and work in
the User Binary Outputs (A or B) area
or in the Hardware Workbench area.
Note: The Communications Workbench executes at a lower level

than the Hardware Workbench. Users should implement
realtime functions entirely in the Hardware Workbench
where all control actions are traceable. Communications
can be brought traceably into the Hardware Workbench
via the Workbench Inputs/Communications menu. Other
transfers of Communication signals to the Hardware
Workbench are not explicitly provided for.
5-39
DNP Basic Settings
DNP Advanced Settings
5-40
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
DNP Unsolicited Settings
5-41
DNP I/O Map Settings
The new settings

available from these
menu options will only
become active if they
are assigned the next
contiguous number.
Optional LS Outputs
Optional Loop Scheme outputs for available for Form 6 con-
trols equipped with the LS option. The LS scheme and
Workbenches must be loaded.
Setting these outputs to a logical 1 with activate these loop
scheme-specific communication functions:
• Comm LS Disable
• Comm SI Disable
• Comm SII Disable
• Reset LS
Optional LS Inputs
Seventeen intermediate variables are provided to allow sig-
nals to be sent between Workbench blocks.
The Voltage Level Indicators menu provides three interme-
diate variables for Source I and Source II.
Once defined, the intermediate variables can be used by
dragging them out of the Optional LS Inputs menu.
5-42
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Modbus Workbench
tom configure Modbus points and settings.
The user should be familiar with SCADA control and have a
basic understanding of Modbus.
The default Workbench structures provides the user access
to analog and control parameters within the scheme. The
flexibility of the Modbus system allows the user to modify
the structure via the Communications Workbench.
Access the Modbus Workbench as follows:
1. Click on the Modbus Workbench graphic.
The Modbus Workbench blocks will appear.
Note: The Modbus default point database is in the
modbusf6dat.xls.
Click here to access the Click here to access the Analog

Slave Address = 1 Settings. Input Mapping Settings.
Click here to open

the input toolboxes.
Click here to access the default

analog and binary output
assignments.
These outputs from the Form 6
scheme are inputs to SCADA.
5-43
2179 Workbench
tom configure 2179 protocol points and settings.
Access the 2179 Workbench as follows:
1. Click on the 2179 Workbench graphic.
The 2179 Workbench blocks will appear.
Note: The 2179 default point database is in the
2179F6dat.xls.
Click here to access the Refer to 2179 I/O Map

Refer to Communication Settings HTML screen that Settings section for
section for screen information. displays the 2179 Tables. screen information.
Click here
to open
the input
toolboxes. Click here to access factory-
assigned and user analog, binary,
and counter inputs mapping.
These outputs and

used with Form 6
Click here to access
factory-assigned and
Click here to access factory-assigned and User 2179 Special
user Binary Output Mapping. Calculation Mapping
5-44
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Communication Settings
Select either the rear RS232 or

rear RS485 communication port
here.
Select the appropriate baud rate

here.
Select Yes or No for Clear to

Send support here.
Select whether or not to ignore

the Master Address here.
5-45
2179 I/O Map Settings
The new settings

contiguous number.
Optional LS Outputs
• Comm LS Disable
• Comm SI Disable
• Reset LS
Optional LS Inputs
5-46
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
IEC870-5-101 Workbench
tom configure IEC870-5-101 protocol points and settings.
Access the IEC870-5-101 Workbench as follows:
1. Click on the IEC870-5-101 Workbench graphic.
The IEC870-5-101 Workbench blocks will appear.
Note: The IEC60870-5-101 default point database is in the
iec608705f6dat.xls.
Click here to access the

Refer to Basic and Advanced HTML screen that displays Refer to EC870-5-101
Settings sections for screen the IEC870-5-101 Tables. I/O Map Settings
information. section for screen
information.
Click here
to open
the input
toolboxes.
These outputs and

inputs should only be Click here to access factory-
used with Form 6 assigned and user Measured
controls equipped with Value, Single Point, Double
the loop scheme option. Point, Single Command, and
Floating Point mapping.
5-47
IEC870-5-101 Basic Settings
IEC870-5-101 Advanced Settings
5-48
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
IEC870-5-101 I/O Map Settings
The new settings

contiguous number.
Optional LS Inputs
Optional LS Outputs
• Comm LS Disable
• Comm SI Disable
• Reset LS
5-49
DNP TCP/IP Workbench

tom configure DNP TCP/IP points and settings.
Access the DNP TCP/IP Workbench as follows:
1. Click on the DNP TCP/IP Workbench graphic.
The DNP TCP/IP Workbench blocks will appear.
Note: The DNP default point database is in the
dnpf6dat.xls.
Refer to DNP Basic and Advanced Click here to access the HTML
Settings sections for screen information. screen that displays the DNP Tables.
Click here to open the

input toolboxes.
Click here to access factory-

Refer to DNP I/O Map assigned and user analog, binary,
Settings section for and counter input mapping.
screen information.
These outputs and

used with Form 6
Click here to access factory-assigned

and user Binary Output Mapping.
5-50
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
DNP TCP/IP Basic Settings
DNP TCP/IP Advanced Settings
5-51
DNP I/O Map Settings
The new settings

contiguous number.
Optional LS Outputs
• Comm LS Disable
• Comm SI Disable
• Reset LS
Optional LS Inputs
5-52
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Workbench User Settings

Group dependent settings can be configured and added to
the Idea Workbench. These values can change with the
active setting group (profile).
These settings can be added to the Idea Workbench from
the Workbench Inputs > User Workbench Settings toolbox.
WARNING: Recloser Misoperation. CAUTION: Recloser Misoperation.

! Power distribution equipment programming ! Before downloading configuration files or
parameters and user-defined control logic hierar- settings to the equipment, verify that the files and
chies must be properly configured and tested for settings are correct for the location and applica-
the intended application by competent personnel tion. Downloading configuration files or settings
knowledgeable of equipment limitations and safe designed for a different location or application
operation practices. Failure to properly configure can result in severe personal injury and equip-
and test switchgear programming parameters ment damage. G133.0
and user-defined control logic hierarchies can

result in death, severe personal injury, and equip-
ment damage. G132.0
Examples of configured Group Dependent User Settings added to the Idea Workbench.
5-53
Workbench User Enable Settings

The upper portion of the Workbench Group Dependent
Settings dialog box provides access to the four Workbench
Enable Settings, WB:Enable1, WB:Enable2, WB:Enable3
and WB:Enable4. These settings are binary inputs, which
are to be used to enable or disable custom logic sections
(by logically ANDing with the logic).
Each variable can be given a name as it will appear in the
Idea Workbench. This dialog box is where the setting is
made for these variables.
Note: These settings will not be visible using the settings browser
in the Idea Workbench but must be made here. These set-
tings are still included as part of the Idea Workbench
Settings text file.
The available settings are as follows:
• Name: A 10 character or less string to be used as a
mnemonic for the variable.
• Value: A selection of either Disabled (logical 0) or
enabled (logical 1) must be chosen here.
• Description: A 128 character or less text string that
can be used to describe the setting in more detail.
Workbench User Threshold Settings

The Workbench provides four special "WBThshld" settings
whose values can change with the active setting group
(profile).
The lower portion of this dialog box provides access to the
four Workbench User Threshold Settings, WB:Thshld1,
WB:Thshld2, WB:Thshld3 and WB:Thshld4 from the
Workbench inputs. Each variable can be given a name as it
will appear in the Idea Workbench. In this dialog box is
where the setting is made for these variables.
Note: These settings will not be visible using the settings browser
in the Idea Workbench. They must be made here. These
settings are still included as part of the Idea Workbench
Settings text file.
The available settings are as follows:
• Name: A 10 character or less string to be used as a
mnemonic for the variable.
• Value: The value of the setting.
Note: The value displayed is applicable only to the setting
group currently being viewed. The displayed setting
group is shown at the top of the dialog box.
• Units: The unit of measure of the setting. This is a
text field only and is to be used as a reminder.
• Description: A 128 character or less text string that
can be used to describe the setting with more detail.
5-54
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Workbench Contact Inputs and Outputs

The user can change the name designation of the contact
inputs and outputs. A short name can be assigned to the
contacts for use in the Idea Workbench view and a longer
name (up to 19-characters) can be assigned for use in dis-
playing the name of the contact on the Form 6 control front
panel MMI.
The Workbench>Workbench Contact Inputs and
Workbench>Workbench Contact Outputs menu paths pro-
vide access to the appropriate dialog boxes.
Click on a terminal block to open

up a view of that terminal block.
5-55
Workbench Message Outputs to MMI

The user can configure a text message to be displayed on
the Form 6 control front panel MMI whenever a specific
event or action occurs.
COUNTERS
BATTERY
DNP PROTOCOL
>WORKBENCH
>WORKBENCH MESSAGES
WORKBENCH ANALOGS
WORKBENCH STATUS
WORKBENCH SWITCHES
WORKBENCH NAME . . .
>WORKBENCH MESSAGES
WORKBENCH ANALOGS
WORKBENCH STATUS
WORKBENCH SWITCHES
ENTER
Trip Coil Alarm
MENU
>WORKBENCH MESSAGES
WORKBENCH ANALOGS
WORKBENCH STATUS
WORKBENCH SWITCHES
For example, the user can

configure a message to assert
when a Trip Coil Alarm occurs.
5-56
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Workbench Status Outputs to MMI and SOE

The Idea Workbench provides the ability to trigger up to 16
custom sequence of events (SOE) event types. To set up
the appearance of the messages in the SOE log, open the
Workbench Status Outputs to MMI and SOE dialog box by
following the Workbench>Workbench Status Outputs to
MMI and SOE menu path.
There are 16 Workbench outputs, WBS(#01) through
WBS(#16), which when driven to a logical "1" state will trig-
ger a SOE record using the "SOE ON Description" text
string. Similarly, when the Workbench output drops from a
logical "1" to a logical "0", an SOE event using the "SOE
OFF Description" text string will be triggered.
There are three settings for each output:
WORKBENCH MESSAGES
WORKBENCH ANALOGS • MMI Description - How the event is displayed on the
>WORKBENCH STATUS
WORKBENCH SWITCHES control front panel LCD (17 character maximum)
ENTER • SOE “OFF” Description - The SOE text that appears
when the SOE event transitions to a logical “0” state
Appearance of the event >0=MMI (#01) = status (16 character maximum)
0=MMI (#02) = status
status on the Form 6 0=MMI (#03) = status
control front panel. 0=MMI (#04) = status • SOE “ON” Description - The SOE text that appears
when the SOE event transitions to a logical “1” state
0=MMI (#07) = status (16 character maximum)
MENU
>WORKBENCH MESSAGES
WORKBENCH ANALOGS
WORKBENCH STATUS
WORKBENCH SWITCHES
Check the appropriate box to specify which

event transition(s) you want recorded in the
SOE log:
• Only the transition from OFF to ON
• Only the transition from ON to OFF
• Both transitions
5-57
Workbench Analog Outputs to MMI

The function of these signals is to route up to eight custom
analog values to the Form 6 control front panel MMI. These
analog values can be any quantity and accessed or created
in the Idea Workbench including metering data, counter,
timers.
The eight variables in this section all appear as an excla-
mation point (" ! ") until they are dragged off of the User
Analog Outputs to MMI toolbox and into a User
Workbench. At that time they are named in the form of
"WB(Analog#0X)". The #0X is replaced by the actual num-
ber of the analog value when ProView is communicating
with the Form 6 control. Only floating point signals can be
connected to these outputs.
The analog values are accessed from the front panel by fol-
lowing the Workbench>Workbench Analogs menu path.
Refer to Workbench section in Front Panel Operation
section of this manual.
Note: While it is possible to change the name of the custom ana-
log measurements as they appear on the Form 6 recloser
control LCD display, it does not change the measurement
names as they appear in the Idea Workbench.
Change the measurement names as they appear on the
Form 6 control LCD display as follows:
WORKBENCH MESSAGES 1. Open the Workbench Analog Outputs dialog box.
>WORKBENCH ANALOGS
WORKBENCH STATUS 2. Enter the custom names.
WORKBENCH SWITCHES
ENTER
3. Click on OK.
4. Connect and download to the control.
>A phase = 0.000
Analog #02 = 0.000
Analog #03 = 0.000
Analog #04 = 0.000 Example of custom analog
Analog #05 = 0.000
Analog #06 = 0.000 value routed to the Form 6
Analog #07 = 0.000 control front panel MMI.
Analog #08 = 0.000
MENU
>WORKBENCH MESSAGES
WORKBENCH ANALOGS
WORKBENCH STATUS
WORKBENCH SWITCHES
Name of Workbench Outputs Listing Result of Driving the Block Input

Analog Outputs to MMI
(use "float" signals only) Displays the connected floating point analog signal as the:
WB(Analog#01) 1st Workbench Analog signal on the Form 6 Recloser Control MMI.
WB(Analog#02) 2nd Workbench Analog signal on the Form 6 Recloser Control MMI.
WB(Analog#03) 3rd Workbench Analog signal on the Form 6 Recloser Control MMI.
WB(Analog#04) 4th Workbench Analog signal on the Form 6 Recloser Control MMI.
5-58
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
Workbench MMI Softkey Switches

The function of these signals is to route the status of four
virtual pushbuttons accessible from the control’s front panel
MMI to the Idea Workbench.
The virtual switches are accessed from the front panel by
following the Workbench>Workbench Switches menu path.
Refer to Workbench in Front Panel Operation section of
this manual.
Change the momentary switch names as they appear on
the Form 6 control LCD display as follows:
1. Open the Workbench MMI Softkey Switches dialog
box.
2. Enter the custom names and, if desired, change the
name of the MMI Menu Section Title for User
Workbench Switches.
3. Click on OK.
4. Connect and download to the control.
Changing the name here will change

the name of the Workbench Input as
displayed in the LCD Panel Switches
toolbox and subsequently on the
COUNTERS
Form 6 control front panel display.
BATTERY
DNP PROTOCOL
>WORKBENCH
ENTER
WORKBENCH MESSAGES
WORKBENCH ANALOGS
WORKBENCH STATUS
>WORKBENCH SWITCHES
ENTER
>Momentary Switch #1
Momentary Switch #2
Momentary Switch #3
Momentary Switch #4
ENTER
Example of configured MMI Softkey switch (without a name change).
Push MENU to abort.
Momentary Switch #1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . YES
F4

Push MENU to abort.
Momentary Switch #1
– – – –(OPERATING!)– – – –
Name of Workbench Inputs Listing Result of the Resulting Blocks Output

Softkey Pushbuttons from MMI Output is logical 1 if the:
Momentary Switch #1=0 Momentary Switch #1 on the front panel MMI is pressed.
5-59
Workbench Mode Control Configuration

The Workbench Mode Control Configuration dialog box
allows the user to modify Form 6 recloser control modes of
operation from within the Idea Workbench. The user can
choose from the following configurations:
• Momentary: A momentary contact acts as a toggle
input to the control. For momentary contacts, if a
state is set by the momentary contact input, it can be
reset by DNP, a front panel control button, or a set-
tings change. Conversely, if a state change is set by
DNP, a settings change, or front panel control, it can
be reset by an appropriately configured contact input.
Control functions that act simply to toggle the current
state are "without precedence", which indicates that if
a state was set by the contact input, it can be subse-
quently reset by the other sources of state modifica-
tion (DNP, pushbutton, or settings).
• Latched with Precedence: For a latched contact input
with precedence, if the state of the contact input is
maintained, the state will be maintained, and cannot
be changed by the local front panel pushbutton. A
setting change or Communications control point
assertion cannot override a contact input with prece-
dence. However, if the positive state is not maintained
at the contact input, any of the other settings methods
can act to modify the state.
• Latched without Precedence: For a latched contact
without precedence, the state is set when the contact
is asserted, and reset when the contact input is de-
asserted. The contact input can be asserted, and a
subsequent DNP, front panel pushbutton, or setting
can reset the state, while the contact input remains
asserted.
The user must refer to this screen to determine if

the output is configured for Momentary, Latched
with Precedence, or Latched without Precedence.
The appearance of the output in the Workbench
does not display the mode control configuration.
5-60
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
For any of the mode controls to effect the state of a mode,
the following must be accomplished:
1. The control protection mode must be selected from
the Workbench Outputs Control Protection Modes
toolbox (high or low priority).
2. It must be placed within the Idea Workbench.
3. It must be driven by a signal.
If you do not place any mode control blocks within the Idea
Workbench, only downloading new settings from ProView,
completing front panel MMI operations, or controlling via
communications can modify the mode.
Note: The Hot Line Tag switch on the Form 6 control front
panel, when in the ON position, overrides any mode
control operating within the Idea or Communications
Workbenches.
Note: The high priority mode controls take priority over low
priority mode controls.
If a high-priority mode is being driven to the active state
from within the Idea Workbench, and the high priority con-
trol for the subject mode is set to Latch w/ Precedence in
the Mode Control Configuration dialog box, the mode will
remain in the Enabled state regardless of transitions on the
low priority mode control or operation of the Ground Trip
Block or Non-reclosing front panel buttons.
Note: The mode can be modified by a communication mas-
ter if supervisory control is enabled.
If a Latch w/Precedence high priority control is driven to the
inactive state from within Idea Workbench, or is not used in
the Idea Workbench at all, the mode can be changed by
any of the following means and according to the following
conditions:
• A remote master communicating through the commu-
nications protocol installed in the Communications
Workbench can set the mode to either Enabled or
Disabled.
• A rising edge at the input of a low priority control for
the mode placed within the Idea Workbench will tog-
gle the state of the mode.
• A rising edge of the high priority mode control will tog-
gle the state of the mode, if that mode control is con-
figured for Momentary operation.
• A rising edge of the high priority mode control will set
the mode to the enabled state, if that mode control is
configured for Latch w/o Precedence operation.
• A falling edge of the high priority mode control will set
the mode to the disabled state, if that mode control is
configured for Latch w/o Precedence operation.
• If the mode is one of Ground Trip Block or Non-
reclosing, operation of the associated front panel but-
tons will toggle the state of the mode.
• If a user downloads ProView settings to the control,
the settings in the downloaded scheme will take effect
when the download is complete.
5-61
Workbench Description
The Workbench Description dialog box enables the user to
change a Workbench name.
Note: This feature is also available via the Workbench Files menu
or the Settings>Simplified Setup screen.
1. Open the Workbench Description dialog box.
The Description text will be highlighted.
2. Type in the new Description text.
3. Click on OK.
5-62
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
S280-70-4
5-63
!
SAFETY
FOR LIFE
©2003 Cooper Industries, Inc.
Kyle® is a registered trademark of Cooper Industries, Inc.
Communications WorkbenchTM, Idea WorkbenchTM, ProViewTM, TCC EditorTM, and
Virtual Test SetTM are trademarks of Cooper Industries, Inc.
Intel® and Pentium® are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S.
and other countries.
Microsoft® Windows® 95 and Windows NT® are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
P.O. Box 1640
Acrobat® and Reader® are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Waukesha, WI 53187
Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. www.cooperpower.com
KMW
KA2048-544 Rev: 03 9/03

Reclosers: Kyle Form 6 Microprocessor-Based Recloser Control Programming Guide

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document informationS280-70-4 Reconectador Form 6

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

Reclosers: Kyle Form 6 Microprocessor-Based Recloser Control Programming Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Reclosers: Kyle Form 6 Microprocessor-Based Recloser Control Programming Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Reclosers

Kyle® Form 6 Service Information

September 2003 • Supersedes 1/03 1-1

• Is trained in the care and use of protective equipment

Hazard Statement Definitions

WARNING: Indicates a potentially hazardous

Table of Contents (continued from page 1-1)

Table of Contents (continued from page 1-3)

Important User Information

What's In This Manual

Front Panel Password

Three Levels of Access

Status Indication and Control Programming

ALARM: Indicates an alarm has been issued. Review the

LCD Menu Display

Refer to the Front Panel Operation section of this manual

LCD Menu Hot Keys

Recloser Operation and Function Keys

Nine Function Keys

Section 2: Front Panel Operation

CAUTION: System Misoperation. The CAUTION: Recloser Misoperation. Before

ENTER PASSWORD Only one profile is active at any time.

F1 ENTER 1. Move the cursor (>) to SETTINGS.

Modify Protection Profile Group

Overcurrent Protection Settings

Minimum Trip (for Phase, Ground, and Negative Sequence)

TCCPMinTrip see help

Curve Selection for TCC1 and TCC2

(or Press F4 to CANCEL) (or Press F4 to CANCEL)

>TCC1PCurve 117 >TCC2PCurve 101

Multiplier for TCC1 and TCC2

TCC1PCurve 104 TCC2PCurve 117

Adder for TCC1 and TCC2

Minimum Response Time Adder for TCC1 and TCC2

>Phase When enabled, the minimum response time of a given TCC

ENTER ENTER 10 600

TIME [cycles (60 hertz basis)]

TCC1PAddEn Disable TCC2PAddEn Disable Response

>TCC1PMRTAE Enable >TCC2PMRTAE Enable

To Set MRTA Adder:

High Current Trip Settings for TCC1 and TCC2

TCC1PMRTA 0.013 TCC2PMRTA 1.00 ENTER ENTER

+ or - + or - TCC1PHCTDly (sec) TCC2PHCTDly (sec)

TCC1PMRTA 0.013 TCC2PMRTA 1.00

TCC1PHCT Mul TCC2PHCT Mul

TCC1PMRTA 0.013 TCC2PMRTA 1.00 4

TCC1PHCTDly 0.016 TCC2PHCTDly 0.016 2

SELECT AN OPTION 5 cycles

Actv Profi Norm

Operation Sequence - Phase/Negative Sequence

Actv Profi Norm

>PQOper#1 TCC1 PQOper#1 TCC1 PQOper#1 TCC1 PQOper#1 TCC1

ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER

PQOper#1 PQOper#2 PQOper#3 PQOper#4

Operation Sequence - Ground

Actv Profi Norm

>GndOper#1 TCC1 GndOper#1 TCC1 GndOper#1 TCC1 GndOper#1 TCC1